diff options
| author | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 18:40:24 -0700 |
|---|---|---|
| committer | Roger Frank <rfrank@pglaf.org> | 2025-10-14 18:40:24 -0700 |
| commit | c7df13c1a3b151d948a899ea108716fe12639fe7 (patch) | |
| tree | ed6ce51620cda868f0b89270f9311dd93e6276d4 /old/44394-h | |
Diffstat (limited to 'old/44394-h')
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/44394-h.htm | 9218 | ||||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg | bin | 0 -> 121428 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg | bin | 0 -> 50113 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg | bin | 0 -> 49970 bytes | |||
| -rw-r--r-- | old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg | bin | 0 -> 15769 bytes |
5 files changed, 9218 insertions, 0 deletions
diff --git a/old/44394-h/44394-h.htm b/old/44394-h/44394-h.htm new file mode 100644 index 0000000..02087fd --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/44394-h.htm @@ -0,0 +1,9218 @@ +<!DOCTYPE html PUBLIC "-//W3C//DTD XHTML 1.0 Strict//EN" + "http://www.w3.org/TR/xhtml1/DTD/xhtml1-strict.dtd"> +<html xmlns="http://www.w3.org/1999/xhtml" xml:lang="en" lang="en"> + <head> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Type" content="text/html;charset=iso-8859-1" /> + <meta http-equiv="Content-Style-Type" content="text/css" /> + <title> + The Project Gutenberg eBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely. + </title> + <style type="text/css"> + +body { + margin-left: 10%; + margin-right: 10%; +} + + p {margin-top: .75em; + text-align: justify; + text-indent: 1.25em; + margin-bottom: .75em; + } + img {border: 0;} + .tnote {border: dashed 1px; margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; padding-bottom: .5em; padding-top: .5em; + padding-left: .5em; padding-right: .5em;} + .copyright {text-align: center; font-size: 70%;} + .adtitle2 {font-size: 150%; font-weight: bold; text-align: center;} + + .author {font-size: 120%; text-align: center;} + .authorof {font-size: 70%; text-align: center;} + .center {text-align: center;} + .smcap {font-variant: small-caps;} + + .caption {font-weight: bold; font-size: 90%;} + .poem2 {margin-left: 15%; text-align: left;} + .footnotes {border: dashed 1px;} + .footnote {margin-left: 10%; margin-right: 10%; font-size: 0.9em;} + .fnanchor {vertical-align:baseline; + position: relative; + bottom: 0.33em; + font-size: .8em; + text-decoration: none;} + + + h1,h2,h3 { + text-align: center; /* all headings centered */ + clear: both; +} + + +hr { + width: 33%; + margin-top: 2em; + margin-bottom: 2em; + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; + clear: both; +} + +hr.chap {width: 65%} + + + +table { + margin-left: auto; + margin-right: auto; +} + +.pagenum { /* uncomment the next line for invisible page numbers */ + /* visibility: hidden; */ + position: absolute; + left: 92%; + font-size: smaller; + text-align: right; +} /* page numbers */ + + +/* Images */ +.figcenter { + margin: auto; + text-align: center; +} + + + + + </style> + </head> +<body> + + +<pre> + +Project Gutenberg's The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by Wilmer M. Ely + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + + +Title: The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico + or, On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek Spongers + +Author: Wilmer M. Ely + +Release Date: December 9, 2013 [EBook #44394] + +Language: English + +Character set encoding: ISO-8859-1 + +*** START OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + + + + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + + + + + +</pre> + + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 502px;"> +<img src="images/cover.jpg" width="502" height="800" alt="cover" /> +</div> +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 303px;"> +<img src="images/i002.jpg" width="303" height="500" alt="Charley pointing rifle" /> +<div class="caption">"Charley leveled his gun and sent sixteen shrieking bullets just +above the wheelman's head."</div> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_1" id="Page_1">[1]</a></span></p> +<div class="figcenter" style="width: 310px;"> +<img src="images/i003.jpg" width="310" height="500" alt="title page" /> +</div> +<h1>The Boy Chums<br /> +In the Gulf of Mexico</h1> + + +<div class='center'><small>OR</small><br /> +<br /> +On a Dangerous Cruise with the Greek<br /> +Spongers<br /> +<br /> +<span class='author'><span class="smcap">By</span> WILMER M. ELY</span><br /> +<span class='authorof'>Author of "The Boy Chums on Indian River," "The Boy<br /> +Chums on Haunted Island," "The Boy Chums in<br /> +the Forest," "The Boy Chums' Perilous Cruise."</span><br /> + +<br /><br /> +A. L. BURT COMPANY<br /> +NEW YORK<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_2" id="Page_2">[2]</a></span></p> + + + + +<div class='copyright'> +Copyright 1913<br /> +<span class="smcap">By A. L. Burt Company</span><br /> +<br /> +THE BOY CHUMS IN THE GULF OF MEXICO<br /> +</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<h2>CONTENTS</h2> + + + + +<div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="4" cellspacing="0" summary="contents and book spine"> +<tr><td align="left"><img src="images/spine.jpg" width="97" height="500" alt="spine" /> +</td> +<td align="left"><div class="center"> +<table border="0" cellpadding="1" cellspacing="0" summary="Contents"> +<tr><td align="right">I.</td> +<td align="left"> </td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_3">3</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">II.</td> +<td align="left">MR. DRIVER.</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_11">11</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">III.</td> +<td align="left">PREPARATIONS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_19">19</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">IV.</td> +<td align="left">THE START</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_27">27</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">V.</td> +<td align="left">THE START</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_36">36</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VI.</td> +<td align="left">FIRST TROUBLE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_45">45</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VII.</td> +<td align="left">SPONGING</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_53">53</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">VIII.</td> +<td align="left">TROUBLE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_61">61</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">IX.</td> +<td align="left">MANUEL'S RELEASE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_68">68</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">X.</td> +<td align="left">A RASH RESOLVE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_76">76</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XI.</td> +<td align="left">A MYSTERY</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_84">84</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XII.</td> +<td align="left">IN A DIVING SUIT</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_94">94</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIII.</td> +<td align="left">A CLOSE CALL</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_100">100</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIV.</td> +<td align="left">THE DISCUSSION</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_107">107</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XV.</td> +<td align="left">A DESPERATE PLAN</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_115">115</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVI.</td> +<td align="left">TOO LATE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_122">122</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVII.</td> +<td align="left">OUTWITTED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_129">129</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XVIII.</td> +<td align="left">IMPRISONED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_136">136</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XIX.</td> +<td align="left">WRECKED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_144">144</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XX.</td> +<td align="left">HUNTING HELP</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_152">152</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXI.</td> +<td align="left">THE CASTAWAYS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_159">159</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXII.</td> +<td align="left">ANOTHER DANGER</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_167">167</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIII.</td> +<td align="left">THE RELAPSE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_175">175</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIV.</td> +<td align="left">THE FLOOD</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_182">182</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXV.</td> +<td align="left">THE FLOATING HATCH</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_189">189</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVI.</td> +<td align="left">WITH THE BOYS</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_197">197</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVII.</td> +<td align="left">THE JOURNEY</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_205">205</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXVIII.</td> +<td align="left">JUDSON</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_212">212</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXIX.</td> +<td align="left">THE FEUD</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_219">219</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXX.</td> +<td align="left">BESIEGED</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_225">225</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXI.</td> +<td align="left">THE ENEMIES</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_233">233</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXII.</td> +<td align="left">THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_240">240</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXIII.</td> +<td align="left">THE RESCUE</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_247">247</a></td> +</tr> +<tr><td align="right">XXXIV.</td> +<td align="left">CONCLUSION</td> +<td align='right'><a href="#Page_255">255</a></td> +</tr> +</table></div></td></tr> +</table></div> + + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_3" id="Page_3">[3]</a></span></p> + + + + +<div class='adtitle2'>THE BOY CHUMS<br /> + +IN THE GULF OF MEXICO</div> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER I.</h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">It's</span> just like stepping suddenly into a strange +country. I am glad we came even if we decide not +to go into the business."</p> + +<p>The speaker, a sturdy, manly-looking boy of eighteen, +was one of a party of four persons who were +strolling along a street in the Greek section of +Tarpon Springs, a small Florida town, located on +the Anclote River, a few miles from the Gulf of +Mexico. His companions were a boy about his +own age but of less robust appearance, a little negro +lad with a good-humored intelligent face, and a +middle-aged, heavily-bearded, blue-eyed man whose +tattooed arms and rolling gait told of a life spent on +tossing seas and whose confident bearing and air of +authority stamped him as one above the rank of a +common sailor.</p> + +<p>Those who have followed The Boy Chums<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_4" id="Page_4">[4]</a></span> +through their many adventures will recognize in +the little party their old friends Charley West, +Walter Hazard, Captain Westfield and the Bahama +lad, Chris, who lately returned from a perilous trip +along the Atlantic beach searching for wreckage, +and now seeking some promising venture in which +to invest the Fifteen Hundred Dollars they earned +on that voyage.</p> + +<p>"You're right, Charley," agreed the other boy. +"I didn't know before that there was a sight like +this in Florida. Here's a bench. Let's set down +and rest a bit. I am tired from walking."</p> + +<p>"Golly, I reckon dis nigger's tired some too," +chimed in the little darkey, "I'se dun had de toothache +in mah legs for most an hour, but I'se had to +keep up wid you-alls. Don't dare let you white +chillen prognostracate 'round a queer place like dis +alone."</p> + +<p>The seat selected was a long bench standing on +the edge of the sidewalk, its back to the sandy street. +The four seated themselves at one end and gazed +around with eager interest at the strange scene, unconscious +of the curious glances bestowed upon them +by a large, deeply-tanned man, who, seated on +the other end of the bench, was languidly whittling +on a piece of white pine with a large sheaf knife.</p> + +<p>The scene was one to arouse more than passing +interest. Up and down the sidewalk hurried<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_5" id="Page_5">[5]</a></span> +swarthy-faced, powerfully-built men of all ages and +appearances, but all possessed of the same clear-cut +features and straight noses. Singly and in groups +of two and three, they hurried past, picturesque in +their bright-colored clothing with gaudy sashes +knotted about their waists. About all clustered an +air of energy and bustle uncommon to sleepy Florida +towns.</p> + +<p>Built up close to the inner edge of the sidewalk +was a row of large buildings startling in their coats +of bright yellow, red, blue, and green paint. +Stretching away, close together in the distance, they +gave one the impression of a gigantic rainbow. +Through their wide-open doors and windows the interested +onlookers could gain a plain view of the interiors, +from which came the confused jangle of +foreign tongues. To the right of where the little +party sat was a busy grocery store, its windows +filled with strings of dried garlic, strange-looking +cheeses, queer nuts and fruits and a multitude of +eatables strange to American eyes. To the left of +them was a tobacco factory, the whirling machines +shredding up the huge brown leaves into hair-like +fibers and binding them up into pound packages. +Directly before them was a great hall filled with +little tables around which were seated groups of the +regular-featured men, playing cards, eating, or puffing +at strange pipes, with a small hose for a stem, +the smoke passing through great glass vessels partly<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_6" id="Page_6">[6]</a></span> +filled with rose water before it reached the smoker's +lips.</p> + +<p>"That's the fifteenth place of that kind I've +counted to-day," remarked Charley West. "From +their numbers, one would imagine that these people +did nothing but eat and play cards."</p> + +<p>"I'd like to try one of them pipes," said Captain +Westfield, wistfully. "I'll bet they give a good, +cool smoke."</p> + +<p>"Let's go in and get dinner," Walter suggested. +"I am hungry as a wolf and that food smells +mighty good. You can try a pipe after we eat, Captain."</p> + +<p>The man at the end of the bench shifted his position +closer to them.</p> + +<p>"Strangers here?" he enquired.</p> + +<p>"Just came in this morning. We're looking into +the sponge business a bit," replied the Captain.</p> + +<p>Charley eyed the tanned man closely. There was +a sinister expression to the fellow's face, and his +eyes shifted uneasily away from the lad's level +glance. The keen-witted boy was not favorably +impressed with the stranger's appearance, but the +man's cordiality drove away his faint feeling of +distrust.</p> + +<p>"I'll go in with you then," he offered. "Those +fellows don't speak much English and you would +have a hard job making them understand what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_7" id="Page_7">[7]</a></span> +you wanted. I know a little Greek and may be able +to help you out a bit."</p> + +<p>"Much obliged to you," said the Captain, gratefully. +"We don't understand a word of their +lingo. I'll stand treat to the dinner if you'll eat with +us."</p> + +<p>"It's a go," agreed the stranger, quickly. "Come +on. My name's Robert, Captain Roberts," he volunteered +when the little party were seated around +one of the tables, "I'm a retired ship's master."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield introduced himself and his +companions. "As I said, we are lookin' into this +sponge business a bit, but it's hard to pick out the +proper course from these twisted-tongued furriners," +he said. "Do you happen to know anything +about it?"</p> + +<p>"I used to be in the business myself," Captain +Roberts replied promptly. "I made enough money +in it to quit the sea for good."</p> + +<p>"Then I reckon you're the very man to give us a +few pointers. Is there as much money in it as one +hears tell of?"</p> + +<p>"More," declared the other. "These Greeks are +getting rich off sponging. It is not anything unusual +for a schooner's crew to clear up three or four +thousand dollars from a single trip. It takes quite +a bit of money to make a start, though."</p> + +<p>"We have got a little change in our clothes,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_8" id="Page_8">[8]</a></span> +said the Captain, modestly. "Do you reckon a person +could get started good on a Thousand dollars?"</p> + +<p>"That would do nicely," declared Captain Roberts, +"and I can tell you just how to lay it out to the +best advantage, but let's order dinner first. We can +talk while we are eating."</p> + +<p>He beckoned to a dark-skinned, ill-favored waiter +and gave an order in low-pitched fluent Greek.</p> + +<p>The waiter was back almost instantly with a tray-load +of steaming dishes which he placed upon the +table. The boys could not determine the exact nature +of the strange viands, but they were too hungry +to be critical, and attacked the food with hearty +appetites.</p> + +<p>"This mutton stew is delicious," Charley declared +as he took another helping. "I don't know +as I ever tasted anything better."</p> + +<p>Captain Roberts grinned. "You don't want to +make any guesses about Greek food," he declared. +"That isn't mutton, but just tough old Billy-goat, +fattened on a diet of tin cans. These fellows have +the knack of fixing up such things so they can't +recognize them themselves. Just wait till the +coffee is served. You'll say you never drank any +better. But let's get back to that sponging business +now, Captain."</p> + +<p>He and Captain Westfield were soon plunged in +a tangled maze of talk about schooners, diving boats, +sponges, and divers.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_9" id="Page_9">[9]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys gave but little heed to the discussion for +their attention was partly diverted by the unusual +scene around them.</p> + +<p>"It's just like being in another country," Walter +whispered to his chum.</p> + +<p>"Yes, but I don't like the attention we seem +to receive," Charley replied. "Those fellows are +staring at us as though there was something wrong +in our being here."</p> + +<p>The Greeks gathered around the other tables +indeed seemed more than casually interested in the +little party. They stared frequently at them and +their new acquaintance, and exchanged significant +glances and low words with each other.</p> + +<p>"I guess we appear as odd to them as they do to +us," Walter said, carelessly. "There is a man who +is not a Greek. That fellow leaning against the +end of the counter in the corner."</p> + +<p>The man indicated was unmistakably an American. +He was short, heavily-built and had a determined, +aggressive face. He was engaged in a heated +discussion with the proprietor of the cafe and his +heavy face was flushed with anger. As the boys +gazed curiously, he brought down his clenched fist +on the counter with a force that shattered some of +the dishes piled upon it.</p> + +<p>"You needn't smirk, grin, and make excuses," he +thundered at the suave, smiling Greek. "You've +got to pay me that bill you owe me. It's been standing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_10" id="Page_10">[10]</a></span> +for months and I happen to know that you are +making money all the time, hand over fist. It's no +use pretending you don't understand me," he +shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoulders. +"You know what I say. If you don't come +up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up +this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining +goods under false pretences. And it will not be any +use for you to try your nice little Greek trick of a +knife in my back in the dark. I go heeled and I +don't go to sleep when I walk this street. The +fellow who tries that trick on me will stop enough +lead to start a cartridge factory."</p> + +<p>He turned and was walking towards the door +when his glance rested for a moment on the boys +and their companions. His glance swept swiftly +over each member of the little party. He paused, +hesitated a moment, then turning, walked swiftly +towards their table.</p> + +<p>Captain Roberts rose hastily at his approach. +"There's a friend of mine over there," he said hurriedly, +"who I want to speak to. I'll be back in a +minute."</p> + +<p>The approaching stranger noted his departure +with a grim smile. He stopped beside the Captain +and stood gazing down for one brief minute.</p> + +<p>"Are you fools or strangers?" he demanded, +crisply.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_11" id="Page_11">[11]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER II.<br /> + +<small>MR. DRIVER.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> stranger's smile robbed his words of their +hardness.</p> + +<p>"Strangers, yes," Charley replied, "Fools, no."</p> + +<p>"No offense intended," said the man, quickly. +"Strangers will sometimes take advice but fools +will not. My advice to you strangers is to keep out +of places like this and not to make friends with +other strangers. I don't suppose you know who +that man is who just left you."</p> + +<p>"He's a retired sea captain," said Captain Westfield. +"He was giving us some pointers about the +sponge business. Mighty pleasant an' obligin' fellow. +Mighty fair-spoken."</p> + +<p>"Bless your simple little souls," exclaimed the +stranger. "He's no captain, active or retired. He's +the runner for this place. Lucky you haven't any +of you drank your coffee yet. You'd be waking up +in some alley bye-and-bye with your heads aching +from knock-out drops and your pockets turned inside +out. My, but you were easy."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_12" id="Page_12">[12]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't reckon any one would dare do such a +thing in broad daylight," Captain Westfield declared.</p> + +<p>"It's been done in this place a dozen times. +And the victim's kicks never did any good after it +happened, for there was always a dozen Greeks +ready to go on the stand and swear that it was only +a case of drunkenness on the victim's part. Better +get out of here."</p> + +<p>The humbled little party arose and followed their +conductor out to the sidewalk. As they passed +through the crowd they could not help but notice +the wrathful glances the sitters bestowed upon the +one who had cheated them of their victims.</p> + +<p>"I guess we have acted pretty green," Charley +admitted, as they passed outside, "but we were so +eager to learn about the sponge business that we +forgot caution. Besides, one does not look for such +tricks in a little town like this. It's not like a big +city where one has to be always on his guard against +strangers."</p> + +<p>The stranger favored the members of the little +party with a closer scrutiny than he had yet bestowed +upon them.</p> + +<p>"So you are figuring on going into the sponge +business, eh?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"We may try it a bit if we find out that it pays as +well as we have heard tell of," answered Captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_13" id="Page_13">[13]</a></span> +Westfield, cautiously, "but it's mighty hard to find +out anything definite about it from these Greeks."</p> + +<p>"Oh, there's big money in it all right," said their +new friend. "You might make a go of it. You +are a pretty husky, determined-looking lot and +would soon get on to the Greekish tricks. It's a +risky business, though. I don't advise anyone to +take it up."</p> + +<p>"We've encountered a few risks in other lines," +said Charlie, modestly. "We are willing to take a +few chances if there's money enough in it to tempt +us."</p> + +<p>The stranger pulled out his watch and looked at +the time. "My name is Driver," he remarked. "I +own a store over on the next street in the American +section. Business is slack at this time of day and I +will show you around a bit, if you wish. My clerks +can look out for the trade for an hour or two."</p> + +<p>"No need of thanks," he said as the Captain accepted +his offer gratefully. "If you decide to go +into the sponge business, you will need lots of provisions +and I hope to sell them to you. We Americans +do not get any of the Greek trade and we are +always glad to secure a new customer. Now I suppose +you want to know about the profit side of the +business first. Well, I can not give you exact figures +but I know that all engaged in the business are making +big money. All these big buildings you see have +been built out of sponging, and they do not represent<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_14" id="Page_14">[14]</a></span> +a hundredth part of the money made out of the +business. There is an enormous amount sent back +to Greece every month through the post-office and +bank here. I know Greeks who landed here only a +few years ago with nothing but the clothes on their +backs—and those were mighty poor—that are +wealthy men now and they made their fortunes out +of sponges. Oh, there's big money in it all right. +But you can look into that part of the business +closer later on. Now, I want to show you something +of the sponges themselves. We will go down +to the harbor first."</p> + +<p>The interested little party followed him as he led +the way along a soft sand road flanked by scrub +palmettos.</p> + +<p>Their guide paused beside one of the several large +buildings standing close to the road. "This is a +clipping shed," he said.</p> + +<p>The building was open on one side and was filled +with a crowd of old men, women and young boys, +all Greeks. Before each was a pile of rough sponges +from which they were clipping the spoilt parts with +great shearing shears. In one corner, a man worked +over a big screw-press, pressing the severed fragments +of sponges into huge compact bales.</p> + +<p>"That part isn't important enough to waste much +time looking at," Mr. Driver said, as he turned +away. "Come on and I'll show you something +worth seeing."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_15" id="Page_15">[15]</a></span></p> + +<p>As they followed along behind their guide, the +boys became sensible of a strong, pleasant, appetizing +odor in the air, an odor which grew stronger as +they advanced. A turn in the road brought them +suddenly upon the source of the odor. On the shore +of a quiet little land-locked harbor, blazed dozens of +small camp-fires over which sat great iron kettles. +On pieces of canvas laid upon the ground were piles +of fresh beef and mutton. Over each pile worked +several Greeks cutting the meat with the sheaf +knives into tiny squares about an inch in size. Other +Greeks were dumping the little square pieces into +the kettles, while still others kept the contents stirred +and the fires under the kettles burning briskly.</p> + +<p>"They are putting down the meat for their next +voyage," explained Mr. Driver. "They roast it in +its own fat, put it into stone jars, and pour the fat +over it. As soon as the fat cools and congeals it +forms an air-tight covering which keeps the meat +from spoiling."</p> + +<p>"If it tastes half as good as it smells, it must be +delicious," Charley remarked.</p> + +<p>Chris viewed the cooking operation with professional +jealousy. "Golly, I bet dey can't cook like +dis nigger," he declared, "I spect dem kettles ain't +none too clean noway."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield gave but scant attention to the +trying-out process. His interest was centered on the +big fleet of schooners anchored near shore. They<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_16" id="Page_16">[16]</a></span> +were over a hundred in number and were of all +sizes and designs. They made a pretty sight lying +gracefully close together in the little harbor. But +the old sailor soon strolled on to where groups of +Greeks were building and repairing boats on the +shore. He inspected their work with a critical eye, +but he was soon lost in admiration.</p> + +<p>"Lads," he exclaimed, "I never saw such workmen +before. They are turnin' out tight, neat seaworthy +little crafts with no tools but a saw and a +hatchet. Ain't those queer lookin' crafts though."</p> + +<p>The boats were about thirty feet in length, sharp +at both bow and stern, and of enormous depth for +their size. True to their love for bright colors the +Greeks had painted each plank a different hue and +the little vessels looked like floating rainbows.</p> + +<p>The captain viewed their single masts, which inclined +aft at an angle of forty-five degrees, with +deep-sea scorn.</p> + +<p>"It's clean against Nature for a mast to be set +that way," he declared. "It ain't regular or ship-shape."</p> + +<p>"Those small crafts are used as diving boats," +Mr. Driver explained. "They carry a big square +sail, but most of them are equipped with engines +also. They are great sea boats and will ride out a +gale almost as well as the schooners."</p> + +<p>His explanations were interrupted by loud talking<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_17" id="Page_17">[17]</a></span> +close at hand and the little party, full of curiosity, +hastened to the spot from which the uproar came.</p> + +<p>In the center of a circle of curious onlookers, a +large man wearing a marshal's badge was slipping a +pair of handcuffs on the wrists of a slender boyish-looking +young fellow.</p> + +<p>"No need to put those things on me, Mr. Officer," +the lad was protesting, passionately. "I'll go along +with you without any trouble. I've only acted +within my rights and all I want is a fair trial."</p> + +<p>"Anything you say can be used against you at +your trial," cautioned the marshal.</p> + +<p>"I don't care, I admit I shot two of those +treacherous Greeks. It was the only thing to do. +When it came on to blow a gale, they refused to cut +the cable, and work the schooner. It was a case of +making them obey orders and get her off before the +seas or lose my ship. I only wish I had shot more +of them. They have been laying for me ever since +to slip a knife into me and chuck me overboard. I +haven't dared take a wink of sleep for three days +and two nights."</p> + +<p>"Poor fellow," said Mr. Driver, as the marshal +led away his protesting captive. "I expect it happened +just as he says—an open mutiny, compelling +him to shoot—but every Greek in his crew will go on +the stand and swear that it was a case of cold-blooded +murder. Fortunately, the judge is wise to +Greek methods and the law deals gently with commanders."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_18" id="Page_18">[18]</a></span></p> + +<p>"He looked mighty young to be a captain," said +Captain Westfield.</p> + +<p>"It's this way," Mr. Driver explained, "the law +compels the Greeks to have an American captain for +each schooner and diving boat, and they hire the +youngest and, therefore, cheapest man that they can +get. It's a dog's life, out alone for months with a +gang that doesn't speak a word of English. As long +as the captain is content to be a mere figurehead he +can get along without serious trouble, but the minute +he runs counter to their wishes there is a row. +But time is flying, and I must get back to the store. +If you will come back with me I'll introduce you to +a man who knows more about sponging than another +American in the country."</p> + +<p>"Just a moment, lads," said the Captain, as they +turned to go. "Which of those schooners do you +like the best?"</p> + +<p>The two chums unhesitatingly indicated a beautiful +two-masted, snow-white schooner that seemed +to rest as loftily on the water as a floating swan. +The grace and beauty of exquisite lines marked her +out from the many shapely schooners surrounding +her. In large gilt letters on either side of her bow +was her name "Beauty".</p> + +<p>"She's my choice too," declared the Captain. "I +wish we owned her. I ain't never seen a prettier +model."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_19" id="Page_19">[19]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER III.<br /> + +<small>PREPARATIONS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">As</span> soon as they got back into town, Mr. Driver +hunted up the man of whom he had spoken, and, +introducing him to each of the little party, hurried +back to his store.</p> + +<p>Mr. Williams was a young man still in his +twenties. He was a stocky, well-built young fellow +with an intelligent face, determined manner, and a +short, crisp way of speaking. He sized up the little +party with one quick appraising glance as Captain +Westfield stated their errand.</p> + +<p>"If you are not willing to stand hardships, dirt, +discomfort, and danger, you want nothing to do +with sponging," he declared.</p> + +<p>"We can stand anything that it pays us to stand," +Charley replied, quickly.</p> + +<p>"Well, that's the right kind of spirit," approved +the young man, "but, of course you don't any of +you realize what you will have to meet. I've seen +others start in with the same confidence and get cold +feet before the first trip was over. It isn't any nice, +ladies' pink-tea business. It's a game for real men,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_20" id="Page_20">[20]</a></span> +but if the men are the right kind, they get their reward +for what they endure, all right, all right. I +landed here with an empty pocket and emptier +stomach, and now,—well, I am not a John D. Rockefeller +yet, but I've got enough laid by to keep the +wolf from the door for a good many years. Better +men than I have done better than I have. It's like +everything else, the best man wins, and wins something +worth winning, but, as I have said, it's no +business for nice, tender, little Willie boys, it's a +man's game."</p> + +<p>Charley grinned in sympathy with the reliant, +independent spirit of the young fellow which was +close kin to his own traits. "We left off our short +pants last summer," he observed, gravely, "we are +fast learning to dress ourselves, and the Captain +there can even comb his own hair."</p> + +<p>"Good," chuckled the other, "I guess <i>you</i> will +pass muster anyway, so I will give you some idea +of what you will have to expect. First, there is the +loneliness. For three months at a time you'll be at +sea without another soul to talk to, for there are +very few of the Greeks who speak English. With a +party like yours it would not be so bad for you +would be company for each other, but for the +American captains who go out alone with a crew +of Greeks, it's awful. I've known some to go crazy +for sheer loneliness, and few ever make a second +trip,—I'll never forget my first experience. Second,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_21" id="Page_21">[21]</a></span> +sponging is a dirty business, the stench from dying +sponges will upset any but the strongest stomachs. +Third, there are the dangers, storms, accidents, and +troubles with the crew. I have never had any +serious trouble with my own men, but then I understand +their lingo and that counts for a good deal, +and, besides they all know me around here and +know that I will shoot first and explain afterwards—that +counts for still more."</p> + +<p>"All that is interesting, but it ain't to the pint," +said Captain Westfield. "The question is what can +one make off a trip. I reckon them little things +you're telling about is just details."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you'll find them pretty serious details," +Mr. Williams said with a laugh, "but you are +right, the money point is the main thing. That's the +only thing that has kept me in the business. Well, +I had considerable <i>bad</i> luck last trip but I cleaned +up three thousand dollars. I've been doing better +than that."</p> + +<p>The chums looked at each other with expressive +faces while Mr. Williams' keen black eyes twinkled +as he watched them.</p> + +<p>"I seed a schooner down at the harbor," observed +Captain Westfield, carelessly. "She was a pretty +looking little craft and her name just seemed to fit +her—'The Beauty'. If she's good an' sound an' +for sale, I might be willing to give a thousand dollars +for her."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_22" id="Page_22">[22]</a></span></p> + +<p>Mr. Williams laughed, "You are not the first +sailor who has fallen in love with the 'Beauty'. She +is the finest ever. She has led the sponging fleet for +three seasons. Many have tried to buy her but +couldn't. You are in luck, however. Her owner +died last week and I have just received a letter from +his widow asking me to find a purchaser for her. +You can have her as she lays for thirteen hundred +dollars, and she is dirt cheap at that."</p> + +<p>"Will you hold that offer open until ten o'clock +to-night?" asked the captain, "we will want to talk +it all over a bit."</p> + +<p>Mr. Williams agreed to his request, and, after +thanking him gratefully for his information, the +little party took their departure.</p> + +<p>"Back to the harbor," said the captain as soon as +they were out of hearing. "I want to take a good +look at the 'Beauty'. If she is anyway near as good +as she looks from a distance she's worth at least +twenty-five hundred dollars. Why we could make a +tidy sum by buying her, sailing her around to Jacksonville, +and selling her again."</p> + +<p>They soon arrived at the harbor again where for +a quarter they hired a young Greek to row them out +to the schooner.</p> + +<p>They found the little vessel all that her name implied. +She was about sixty-five feet long and broad +for her length. She looked more like a gentleman's +yacht than a sponging vessel and they were all delighted<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_23" id="Page_23">[23]</a></span> +with her appearance. But pleased as they +were with her on deck, they were even more pleased +with her below. There, they found a large main +cabin with swinging lamps, hanging sideboard, easy +chairs, and comfortable furnishings. Opening into +the main cabin were found roomy staterooms, two +on a side, furnished with large bunks containing +springy mattresses. Instead of the small portholes, +common with crafts of her size, each stateroom was +provided with windows of heavy glass to admit air +and light.</p> + +<p>Up forward at the foremast was the forecastle, or +crew's quarters. It was large, comfortable and well +equipped with bunks. Aft of it was the cook's galley, +containing a good stove and plenty of pots, pans +and kettles. Everything was exquisitely neat and +clean. But Captain Westfield was not content with +a mere survey of cabin and furnishings. He unfurled +several of the sails and examined the canvas +closely. He tested the strength of rope after rope. +He climbed aloft and looked over blocks, stays, and +running gear. Lastly, he descended into the hold +and examined all that was visible of the vessel's ribs +and planking.</p> + +<p>"She's as tidy a little craft as I ever saw," he +declared, when he at last rejoined the boys back by +the wheel. "She ain't over six years old an' her +sails an' rigging are all new. She's worth twenty-five +hundred dollars of any man's money if she's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_24" id="Page_24">[24]</a></span> +worth a cent. All we have got to do it to buy her +and carry her around to some lively port an' we can +make twelve hundred dollars as easy as finding it."</p> + +<p>"What's the use of selling her right off if we +buy her," Walter suggested, "Surely a few months' +use will not lessen her value to any great extent. +Why not make a couple of trips sponging in her. +I am anxious to have a try for some of that big +money they all talk about. We will never have a +better chance than now. At the worst, we would +only lose the price of a few months' provisions, we +would still have our vessel worth far more than we +paid for her."</p> + +<p>"You've hit the nail right on the head," the captain +exclaimed, delightedly. "That's just what +I've been studying over, but I reckoned I'd wait an' +see if either of you boys proposed it."</p> + +<p>Charley hesitated before agreeing to his chum's +proposal. "I confess, I am not so anxious to try the +sponge business as I was," he remarked. "First, +we know nothing about it ourselves, and would +have to depend entirely upon hired help—which is +a bad thing to have to do in any business. Second, +I don't like the Greeks, I don't like their appearances, +I don't like the reputation they have, and I +don't like the idea of being with a gang that doesn't +understand English."</p> + +<p>"Bosh," Walter replied, lightly, "we will get +along all right with them. It isn't like one lone man<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_25" id="Page_25">[25]</a></span> +being out with them, there are four of us and they +wouldn't dare start trouble with so many. As for +making them understand, why we can hire a man as +interpreter. I believe it's the best chance to make +money we've had yet."</p> + +<p>"And I too," Captain Westfield agreed. "I +reckon we'd be foolish to let such a chance slip by. +That young fellow Williams says he's made considerable."</p> + +<p>"But he made several trips and learned the business +before he went into it on his own hook," +Charley objected. "However, I am not going to +hold back if the rest of you want to try it."</p> + +<p>"Good," exclaimed the captain, "we will go right +back and settle the deal with Williams. We'll make +money off the schooner if we don't off the sponging."</p> + +<p>They found Mr. Williams still in his office. The +thirteen hundred dollars was paid over and they received +a bill of sale for the 'Beauty', one diving +boat and everything the schooner contained.</p> + +<p>"You've got a good boat at a mighty low price," +he said. "There is no reason why you shouldn't +make well with her, if you just use common sense. +Doubtless, you have heard lots of hard things about +the Greeks, but I don't believe they are half as bad +as they are painted. Half of the trouble captains +have with them comes from their not understanding +each other. Get a reliable man to translate your<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_26" id="Page_26">[26]</a></span> +orders, and you will get along all right although you +will find it a hard life. I wish I could help you +select your crew but I have to go to Tampa to-morrow, +and will not be back until the fleet sails. We +will see each other again on the sponging grounds, +if not before. I wish you the best of luck until we +meet."</p> + +<p>The now tired little party bade the hustling young +man good-bye and repaired to the small hotel where +they engaged rooms and meals.</p> + +<p>After supper Charley unpacked his valise and got +out the silver-mounted revolver presented to him +by Mr. Weston. He noted its calibre and sauntering +down to the hardware store purchased several +boxes of cartridges of a size to fit. He gave a couple +of boxes to Walter who possessed the exact duplicate +of his weapon.</p> + +<p>"That's my first preparation for our trip," he +said laughing.</p> + +<p>But, although he spoke lightly, he was troubled +by vague misgivings that their new venture was not +going to be the smooth sailing his companions believed. +For one thing, he doubted if rough, blunt, +quick-tempered Captain Westfield was just the man +to successfully handle the suave, oily, treacherous +Greeks.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_27" id="Page_27">[27]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IV.<br /> + +<small>THE START.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">We</span> have got to get a move on us," Captain +Westfield said as the four chums gathered together +at the breakfast table. "I've been out enquirin' +around this mornin' an' I've larned that the sponging +fleet sails in two days. Of course we don't have +to go with the fleet, but, bein' as it's our first trip +an' we're green at the business, I reckon, we had +better keep with the crowd an' learn all we can. +I've been up to see the United States Commissioner +an' got charts of the sponging grounds an' took out +papers for the ship. We're all officers on the papers, +lads. He put me down as captain of the schooner, +Chris is mate. You, Charley, are captain of the +diving boats, an' Walter's chief engineer."</p> + +<p>"I don't want to be no mate," Chris protested. +"I wants to be de cook. Dat's schooner's got a +powerful fine galley an' a sight ob pots an' kettles. +Golly! I reckon dis nigger can fix up de grub better +dan any of dem ignorant furriners. A mate +ain't no manner ob count on board a little ship. De<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_28" id="Page_28">[28]</a></span> +captain's always blamin' him for somethin' or udder +an' de crew always hates him. He's always in +trubble wid one or the udder. Now de cook's always +his own boss, he don't hab to stay out nights +in de cold an' de rain an' ebbery one is powerful perlite +to him, 'cause dey wants to keep on de bes' side +ob de one dat handles de grub. I'd rather be a cook +dan an ole mate any day."</p> + +<p>"But you don't know how to rig up their queer +furrin dishes, lad," the captain explained. "They +ain't used to eatin' grub fixed up good like you fix +it."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little +negro, pompously. "I spect dey doan know much +'bout cookin'. Reckon dey wouldn't eat any more +ob der own if dey got a taste ob mine."</p> + +<p>"That's the trouble," the captain agreed craftily, +"an' we don't want to spoil them. Besides, I +reckoned you'd like to be mate. Why, I was at sea +ten years before I got a mate's berth. I reckon your +folks on Cat Island would be mighty proud to hear +that you were one an' was wearing a blue suit with +big brass buttons, an' a cap with Mate on it in big +gilt letters."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the +little negro, delightedly, rising hastily from the +table. "I'se goin' to buy dem clothes right now an' +hab my picture took in 'em an' send 'bout twenty ob +dem to de folks on Cat Island."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_29" id="Page_29">[29]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You got around that pretty neatly, Captain," +Charley said, as soon as Chris was gone. "I expected +him to insist upon being cook. He thinks no +one else can do it so well. But, seriously, don't you +think we are all rather young to be ship's officers. +Men are quite apt to resent having to take orders +from mere boys."</p> + +<p>"The law requires that those four offices be filled +by Americans an' we can't afford to hire men to fill +the places. Chris will be under my orders all the +time an' will be mate only in name. But you boys +are already smart sailors an' I expect you to be real +officers on your boats. If you weren't on the papers +proper you might have trouble with your men, but +the fact that you are regular commissioned officers +will make smooth sailing for you. Any refusal to +obey your orders would be mutiny."</p> + +<p>"Very well, Captain," agreed Walter. "What +do you want Captain West and I to do next?"</p> + +<p>"Just lay around an' enjoy yourselves this mornin', +I guess. The first thing is to get a fellow who +talks Greek an' to hire a crew. I want to pick them +out myself. As soon as we get them there will be +plenty to do stockin' up with grub an' water. Better +spend the time lookin' over your new command an' +pickin' up what you can about the business."</p> + +<p>The advice was good, and, as soon as they had +finished breakfast, the boys hastened down to the +harbor to inspect the diving boats they had acquired<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_30" id="Page_30">[30]</a></span> +with the purchase of the 'Beauty'. Upon a close +inspection, they were delighted with their new commands. +The little vessel was quite new and its +model promised great seaworthiness. Besides the +huge square sail it carried, it was equipped with a +ten-horse power gasoline engine. Its rig was different +from any the boys had ever seen, and they +spent several hours studying it, and making themselves +acquainted with the working of the engine.</p> + +<p>"I believe I can handle it by myself now, if I had +to do it," Charley declared, at last. "The engine +may give us a little trouble at first, but we will soon +get on to it and it's likely there will be several Greeks +in the crew who know how to run it. Now, the next +thing is to settle on a name for our craft."</p> + +<p>"I thought of calling it 'Flora'," Walter said, +with a little sheepish smile.</p> + +<p>"And I was thinking of naming it 'Ola'," declared +Charley promptly.</p> + +<p>After a spirited debate over the two names they +held in such esteem, the two lads at last came to a +compromise by agreeing to call their little ship "The +Two Sisters". This decided, they rummaged +around in the lockers until they found paint and +brushes with which they proceeded to letter on the +bow of their crafts the name chosen.</p> + +<p>As soon as this task was finished, they returned to +the village and made a round of the shops purchasing +clothing for their trip, pricing provisions, and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_31" id="Page_31">[31]</a></span> +learning all they could from the various merchants +about the Greeks and the sponge business.</p> + +<p>They were passing a little photo studio when +Chris' voice hailed them from inside. It was hard +for them to refrain from laughter at the figure the +little negro presented.</p> + +<p>A common blue suit had been too tame a color for +Chris' brilliant-loving soul. He was clothed in a +pair of baggish yellow trousers, many sizes too +large for him, a coat of vivid scarlet hue, and a cap +of deepest purple. But in spite of his brilliant attire, +his little ebony face expressed deepest satisfaction. +On a chair beside him was a great pile of +finished tin-types and the Greek proprietor, beaming +at the unusual rush of business, was just adjusting +his camera to take another.</p> + +<p>"Why, what do you want with any more of them, +Chris?" Walter exclaimed. "You've got enough +already to supply everyone on Cat Island."</p> + +<p>"Dey ain't no good," replied the little darkey, +mournfully, "I 'spect dis man doan know his business."</p> + +<p>Charley examined one of the despised tintypes. +"Why, they look just like you," he declared.</p> + +<p>"Dey's just black an' white," protested the little +negro. "Dey doan show de colors at all."</p> + +<p>The chums turned their heads aside to hide their +grins.</p> + +<p>"That's a Greek camera, Chris," Charley said<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_32" id="Page_32">[32]</a></span> +with a wink at Walter. "You can't expect it to +take American colors. I tell you what to do. Just +write at the bottom of each picture: Pants, yellow; +coat, scarlet; cap, purple."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I nebber thought ob dat," exclaimed the +little darkey, brightening. "But it hain't like habbing +de colors show," he added, mournfully.</p> + +<p>The three were making their way back to the hotel +when their progress was arrested by piercing +screams coming from the rear of a large Greek +restaurant.</p> + +<p>The boys hesitated and looked at each other.</p> + +<p>"Sounds as though someone was hurt pretty +bad," Charley commented, "but I guess we had better +go along about our business. We are likely to +get ourselves into trouble if we meddle with things +in this section," but as he spoke the screams rang +out afresh. The chums looked at each other; there +was no need for words between them.</p> + +<p>"Well, it's foolish, but here goes," Charley exclaimed.</p> + +<p>A narrow alley led into the rear of the building +and down it has hastened followed by his two companions.</p> + +<p>A minute's walk brought them to the scene of the +screams.</p> + +<p>In a little back yard stood a small Greek boy +about thirteen years of age. He was clad only in +short trousers and his bare back and legs were<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_33" id="Page_33">[33]</a></span> +covered with angry welts. Above him towered a +dark, scowling Greek, who was swinging a heavy +cowhide whip, while at each descent of the cruel, +stinging lash the lad's screams rose in piteous protests. +Clustered around was some dozen men and +boys looking on with unconcern.</p> + +<p>Charley caught the Greek's arm as it rose for +another blow. "Stop that, you big brute," he cried, +trembling with anger. "You have no right to beat +a little fellow like that, no matter what he has done. +If you hit him another blow, I'll have you arrested."</p> + +<p>"He won't understand you, Charley," Walter +cautioned.</p> + +<p>But the Greek did understand. He turned a look +of the deepest hate on the plucky lad. For a second +he seemed in the act of striking him with the heavy +whip, but Charley did not flinch. "Try it, if you +dare," he cried.</p> + +<p>The Greek lowered his upraised arm. "Why +should I not strike him?" He demanded savagely, +but in perfect English. "He is mine, I pay his fare +all the way from Greece. All day he plays on the +street and brings home no money. I will beat him +if I wish."</p> + +<p>"You will not," declared Charley, firmly. "If +you do, you will be arrested very quickly. Lad, if +this man attempts to beat you again, you come to us; +you will find us on board the schooner 'Beauty'. If +she is not in the harbor you go to Mr. Driver who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_34" id="Page_34">[34]</a></span> +owns the store, I will tell him about you and he will +see that you are not abused. Do you understand +what I say?"</p> + +<p>"Yes sir, I speak English good," the little lad +replied proudly. "He teach me so I can beg the +pennies."</p> + +<p>The Greek's manner had suddenly changed. His +frown disappeared and he wore a smile that he endeavored +to make pleasant.</p> + +<p>"The noble young gentleman need not worry," he +said, smoothly, "I love the boy and already regret +having whipped him—he is very bad. But it shall +happen no more."</p> + +<p>"It had better not," Charley replied shortly, as he +turned away. "Come on, Walt, I am going to +speak to Mr. Driver about it now."</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver listened to the lad's story with a very +grave face. "I'm afraid you boys have made a +dangerous enemy," he said. "That Greek is Manuel +George, and he is a very bad character. He was +arrested once for the murder of another Greek, but +they could not prove the charge against him although +everyone believed that he had done it. You +want to be very careful as long as you are in Tarpon. +I will gladly have him arrested if the boy +makes any complaint to me."</p> + +<p>The boys found the captain waiting for them at +the hotel. "I've had the best of luck," the old +sailor declared. "I found the very Greek we need<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_35" id="Page_35">[35]</a></span> +to make our orders plain to the crew. He talks +English as good as you or I. I did not lose any time +in gettin' his name on the ship's papers. He +promised to meet us here at the hotel this noon. +There he comes now."</p> + +<p>The chums exchanged a glance of dismay, for approaching +their table, bowing, smiling, and as suave +as though they were his dearest friends was Mr. +Manuel George.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_36" id="Page_36">[36]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER V.<br /> + +<small>THE START.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> captain introduced the boys to the Greek +who beamed upon them as though nothing unpleasant +had ever passed between them. The lads met +his smiling advances with a cold silence which the +captain noticed with puzzled concern.</p> + +<p>As soon as he could do so without attracting too +much notice, Walter drew the old sailor to one side. +"We don't want anything to do with that man," he +declared, and he hurriedly told about the whipping +and repeated what Mr. Driver had said.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield looked troubled. "I wish I'd +known that two hours ago," he said. "He's signed +on with us now an' if I try to get rid of him he can +make a lot of trouble for us. We have got to take +him along. If we don't, he's liable to libel the +schooner an' cost us no end of money and delay."</p> + +<p>Walter's face showed his anxiety and concern.</p> + +<p>"He said he was going to bring a boy along with +him to act as cabin boy," said the old sailor after an +uncomfortable pause. "Maybe it will all work out +for the best. He won't be able to abuse the lad on +the schooner, an' I don't see how he can make us any<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_37" id="Page_37">[37]</a></span> +trouble. All he's to do is to make our orders plain +to the men, it ain't as though he was an officer over +them."</p> + +<p>"Well, if it can't be helped, we have just got to +make the best of it," Walter agreed, "I am going to +keep a mighty close watch on him all the time, +though. We will talk more about it later on. He +keeps glancing at us as though he knew we were +talking about him."</p> + +<p>As soon as he got the chance, Walter told his +chum what the captain had said.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the idea of that fellow going with +us," Charley declared, "but if it has got to be, we +had better start in by treating him friendly. It +won't help matters any to quarrel with him."</p> + +<p>That was sound sense and the boys at once began +to treat the Greek pleasantly, in spite of the dislike +they felt for him.</p> + +<p>There was no doubt but what the fellow understood +his position thoroughly. With his able assistance, +the captain, in a short time, secured a full +crew of fifteen men, including four professional +divers who brought their queer looking suits with +lead shoes and heavy helmets along with them. +The boys were pleased with the appearance of the +men. They were well-built, husky fellows and +looked to be capable sailors. They were much alike +in looks, all being broad-shouldered and swarthy +with clean-cut features and straight noses. One<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_38" id="Page_38">[38]</a></span> +alone seemed to differ greatly from the rest. He +was a tall, powerful, handsome fellow with unusually +small hands and feet. He seemed to be +shunned by the others and left very much to himself. +He was evidently a good sailor and when the +captain set his new crew at work to getting the +schooner ready for sea he performed his part with +a quickness and intelligence that won the old sailor's +approval.</p> + +<p>As soon as the work was well under way, Charley +and Walter, taking the interpreter with them, went +back up town to purchase their stores. The bulk of +their purchases were made at Mr. Driver's store, +but there were many articles that he did not carry +in stock which they had to buy at the Greek stores. +Manuel directed them as to the kind of food their +crew were accustomed to. The bulk of the stores +consisted of ripe black olives in small kegs; queer +looking cheeses, rice, black flour and an abundance +of tea and coffee. The boys bought three whole +beeves and four lambs, directing that all their purchases +should be sent down to the schooner at once.</p> + +<p>"Whew," whistled Charley as he paid the last +bill, "we have only got five dollars left of our fifteen +hundred."</p> + +<p>"Don't you care," Walter replied, confidently. +"We will have a couple of thousand dollars anyway +coming to us when we get back, and still have the +'Beauty' besides."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_39" id="Page_39">[39]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys next visited the hotel and got their +valises and belongings which they carried down to +their new floating home.</p> + +<p>They found that the Greeks already had the meat +cut up and sizzling merrily in the great iron kettles.</p> + +<p>The new crew were a quick and willing lot and before +dark the last article was stored aboard, and, +with the diving boat towing along behind, they +dropped the schooner down the river to the mouth +and anchored for the night just outside amongst a +great fleet of schooners lying ready for an early +morning start for the sponging ground.</p> + +<p>Long after they had eaten their supper and all of +the crew but the anchor watch had retired to the +forecastle, the four chums sat on deck admiring the +beauty of the scene around them. A thousand +lights twinkled from the fleet and high in the air +ahead of them the great lantern of the Anclote lighthouse +on its little island of barren rock.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield awoke the boys early next +morning, "Hurry up on deck if you want to see the +prettiest sight you ever saw," he said. The lads +hustled into their clothing and followed him up the +ladder. As they gained the deck they paused with +exclamations of deepest admiration.</p> + +<p>It was blowing a stiff breeze and the blue water +of the Gulf was dancing and sparkling with white-crested +waves. Around them was the fleet all under +sail, their snowy canvas towering high above their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_40" id="Page_40">[40]</a></span> +shapely hulls. Some lay with sails slatting, still +clinging to their anchorage while their brightly attired +crews worked over windlasses, reeling in the +dripping cables. Some already under way lay +hove-to in the open Gulf waiting for their fellows; +while still others, anchors tripped and sails drawing, +heeling over to the brisk breeze, darted away, sending +the water tossing and foaming from their bows.</p> + +<p>The boys drew a long breath of pure delight at +the beautiful picture.</p> + +<p>"It's grand," Charley cried.</p> + +<p>"Aye, lad," agreed the captain with satisfaction. +"There's no place like the sea for beautiful scenes. +But thar ain't a ship in the whole fleet as pretty as +our own. Just watch her now."</p> + +<p>The old sailor gave a few short orders which the +interpreter repeated to the crew. A dozen of them +sprang to the windlass, while others stood by the +halyards, ready to hoist the big jibs the second the +anchor broke ground. The "Beauty's" huge main +and foresails were already hoisted and her cable +hove short.</p> + +<p>The men at the windlass shouted some words.</p> + +<p>"Anchor broke," translated Manuel.</p> + +<p>"Up helm," commanded the captain, "give her +the jibs."</p> + +<p>The great sails mounted their stays, the +"Beauty's" head played off, and, careening over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_41" id="Page_41">[41]</a></span> +'till her lee rail touched the water, she surged +through the waters like a thing alive.</p> + +<p>The chums watched the foam sweep past in transports +of delight.</p> + +<p>"My, but she's fast," Walter cried.</p> + +<p>"Aye, lad," the captain agreed, joyfully. "I +ain't never seen a faster, except maybe Black Sam's +schooner. We'll have to shorten sail in an hour if +we don't want to run away from the rest of the +fleet."</p> + +<p>The boys watched with delight as the Beauty +overhauled and passed schooner after schooner.</p> + +<p>As she surged past a large black-hulled vessel with +three diving boats in tow, a man on the stranger's +deck waved his cap and shouted,</p> + +<p>"Good luck to you. Better keep with the fleet."</p> + +<p>"That's Mr. Williams," Charley exclaimed. "I +am glad that we are going to be near somebody we +know."</p> + +<p>"Yes, it is Mr. Williams," affirmed Manuel, who +was standing near. "But here is my little boy to +say that your breakfast is ready."</p> + +<p>"What is your name?" Walter enquired of the +little fellow as they all followed him below. "I +could never remember that," he said, when the lad +replied with a very long Greek name. "I guess we +will have to call you Ben for short."</p> + +<p>The band of chums were very hungry and they +seated themselves around the table before the steaming<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_42" id="Page_42">[42]</a></span> +cups of coffee and waited impatiently for the +food to be brought on, but the little Greek lad took +a position behind their chairs and waited.</p> + +<p>"Hurry up, Ben, and bring the breakfast," the +captain ordered.</p> + +<p>"Breakfast there," the lad replied.</p> + +<p>The old sailor repeated his order but Ben replied +as before.</p> + +<p>"I reckon he don't understand," the captain remarked, +"Go up and tell your father, owner, or +whoever he is, to come down."</p> + +<p>The lad was back in a minute with the smiling +Greek.</p> + +<p>"We want our breakfast," the captain explained, +"the boy don't seem to understand."</p> + +<p>"He understands all right, but, I see the cook +does not comprehend. It is the custom to have +coffee only in the morning on sponging ships."</p> + +<p>"Nothing but coffee for breakfast?" roared the +old sailor.</p> + +<p>"We eat but one meal a day and that at night," +the Greek explained. "If the rest of the crew ate +the divers would want to eat also, and that would +be fatal for them. The stomach must be empty +when they descend to the bottom in deep water, +otherwise they die."</p> + +<p>"Well, they can't see us eat an' I want my three +square meals a day," said the hungry sailor.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_43" id="Page_43">[43]</a></span> +"Right saving plan for us though if they only eat +once a day."</p> + +<p>"They eat the whole three meals in one," the +Greek said with a smile. "I will speak to the cook +at once and he will soon have something ready for +you."</p> + +<p>In a very short time they were served with a substantial +meal to which they all did full justice. As +soon as it was finished, they returned to the deck +where they learned that the "Beauty" was already +so far in the lead of the fleet that sail had to be shortened.</p> + +<p>With Manuel's aid the boys picked out their +crews for the diving boat. They found that many +of the Greeks were familiar with gasoline engines +and they selected one of the youngest and most intelligent-looking +for an engineer. The four divers +were, of course, allotted to their boat, but besides +them they had to have two men to work the air +pump and two others to tend to the life-lines, which +made a crew of nine, besides the young officers, and +would leave only Captain Westfield, Chris and the +cook and five men on board the schooner.</p> + +<p>The divers at once began preparations for their +future dangerous work. They examined pump and +air hose very carefully, for a slight leak in either one +would mean death by suffocation beneath the surface. +They brought out their diving suits and went +over them inch by inch for possible rents or tears.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_44" id="Page_44">[44]</a></span> +Many of the suits were old and covered with a multitude +of rubber patches. The boys were amazed +that their owners would dare descend in such worn +suits, but Manuel assured them that the patches were +so cunningly put on that not only would they exclude +water, but they would outlast the suit itself.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_45" id="Page_45">[45]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VI.<br /> + +<small>FIRST TROUBLE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">One</span> of the sailors Charley had selected for his +crew was the tall handsome fellow whom the others +seemed to shun.</p> + +<p>"I can't understand what the rest have against +him," the young captain remarked to his chum. +"He seems very quiet and well behaved, and he is +every inch a sailor. I would ask Manuel about him +but it is bad policy to discuss one of the crew with +another. It always makes trouble. Likely, Manuel +would lie about him anyway, he seems to hate him, +look at him glaring at him now."</p> + +<p>The Greek was leaning against the railing staring +at the sailor who was coiling down a rope near him. +Suddenly the Greek addressed the man in a low +savage tone. The sailor's face grew red with anger, +and he replied shortly in a few hissing words. With +a bound, the Greek cleared the space between the two +and struck the sailor full in the mouth. The man +reeled back against the main mast, but, recovering +himself in a second, sprang for his assailant. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_46" id="Page_46">[46]</a></span> +Greek leaped to one side and whipped out a long +wicked knife.</p> + +<p>Before he could use it, Captain Westfield, belaying +pin in hand, rushed in between the two.</p> + +<p>"Put up that knife," he roared. "I'll do what +fighting there is to be done on this ship."</p> + +<p>The Greek shot one quick glance at him, venomous +with hate, then he glanced beyond him at the +two lads who waited expectantly with hands on their +pistols.</p> + +<p>"He cursed me," he said sullenly, as he slowly +replaced the knife in his pocket.</p> + +<p>"When anyone curses you, report it to me an' +don't take the law in your own hands. I'm master +of this schooner, an' you might as well understand +it right off. Tell that fellow just what I've told +you."</p> + +<p>The sailor's face darkened as the Greek spoke to +him rapidly, but he turned slowly away and walked +forward.</p> + +<p>"That's a bad beginning," Charley remarked to +his chum. "I wish we had never seen that Greek. +I believe he insulted that sailor. The fellow was +behaving himself and tending to his own business."</p> + +<p>He repeated the remark to the captain a little +later.</p> + +<p>"I reckon you're right, lad," agreed the old +sailor, "that Greek seems to be a trouble-maker but +he'll find he's got the wrong man to deal with. I've<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_47" id="Page_47">[47]</a></span> +handled too many crews of tough roughnecks to be +bested by a dirty furriner."</p> + +<p>"I'll bet he will keep you busy with complaints," +Walter said. "How are you going to get at the +truth of it if he does complain about the others of +the crew?"</p> + +<p>"You'll see, I reckon, he will try something like +that but I'm ready for him."</p> + +<p>Sure enough, in less than an hour the Greek approached +the Captain.</p> + +<p>"I hate to trouble you, but I must complain as +you have directed," he said suavely. "The cook, +he is very abusive, I tried to instruct him about +your meals but he answers me with vile names."</p> + +<p>"Bring the cook aft," Captain Westfield commanded.</p> + +<p>Manuel escorted the bewildered-looking cook aft +with a look of sly triumph on his face.</p> + +<p>The captain looked the man over appraisingly. +He was a broad-shouldered, well-muscled fellow. +He spoke to him briefly but the cook shook his +head. He could not understand.</p> + +<p>The old sailor picked up a rope and spread it in +a big circle on the deck.</p> + +<p>"This insulting of you has got to be stopped +right off," he declared, addressing the interpreter. +"Give me your knife."</p> + +<p>The Greek surrendered his weapon.</p> + +<p>"Now both of you get inside that ring and fight it<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_48" id="Page_48">[48]</a></span> +out to a finish," he ordered. "Lick him good for +calling you names."</p> + +<p>Manuel's face fell, and, turning he spoke rapidly +to the cook. "He has apologized and my honor is +satisfied," he declared.</p> + +<p>"All right," the captain said with a wink at the +grinning boys. "Next time any one insults you, +I am going to make you give him a good licking in a +square fist fight. I'm not agoing to let any of the +crew swear at you and call you names—it ain't +right."</p> + +<p>"I guess we won't have any more complaints +from him right off," he chuckled as the disappointed +Greek retired forward.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid we're going to have more or less +trouble through not understanding their language," +Charley said, gravely. "I don't believe he had a bit +of trouble with the cook. He was just aiming to +have you punish the fellow and get you disliked by +the crew."</p> + +<p>"I can handle him all right," the captain declared, +confidently. "If he gets troublesome I'll +iron him and put him down in the hold. I reckon I +can make the rest understand what I want done by +signs, though it would be mighty awkward if a gale +struck us."</p> + +<p>The old sailor soon left the boys in charge of the +deck and went below to write up the log and look +over the charts.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_49" id="Page_49">[49]</a></span></p> + +<p>"If this wind holds we'll be on the edge of the +sponging grounds by night," he said when he returned. +"I didn't realize before how big they are. +Why, they reach clear from Cedar Keys to Cape +Sable, about seven hundred miles."</p> + +<p>"One thing that has puzzled me is that all these +schooners seem to come from Key West," Charley +remarked, '"Of Key West' is lettered on the stern +of every one of them."</p> + +<p>"Key West used to be the headquarters for the +sponging business in the old days," the captain explained. +"They used to gather sponges different +from what they do now. A schooner would take +out about twenty small boats an' a crew of forty +men. When she got to the sponge grounds, the +small boats would scatter out around her, two men +in each boat. One man would do the sculling and +the other would lean over the bow with a water +glass in one hand—a pail with a pane of glass for a +bottom—and a long pole with a hook in the end in +the other. When he spied a sponge on the bottom +through the glass he'd have the other stop sculling +and he would hook it up with his pole. It was +slow, hard work, but they made money at it until +the Greeks came with their expert divers. They +could not compete with them so they either sold or +leased their schooners to the Greeks and went out of +business."</p> + +<p>The old sailor's explanation was interrupted by a<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_50" id="Page_50">[50]</a></span> +howl of "Oh, Golly!" from the cook' galley forward +and Chris, dripping with water, bounded out +of the open door of the little structure, and rushed +aft.</p> + +<p>"I want you to put dat cook in irons, Massa Captain," +he cried. "He's done 'saulted his superior +officer."</p> + +<p>"What did he do to you," the captain asked with +a twinkle in his eye.</p> + +<p>"Throwed a hull pan of dirty, nasty dishwater +obber me. I was jus' tellin' him how he had outer +do, an' tryin' to show de ignorant man how to cook, +when—slosh—he let fly dat big pan full all obber +me."</p> + +<p>The dirty water was streaming from the little +negro's brilliant clothing and his face was streaked +with purple from his cap.</p> + +<p>The captain checked his desire to laugh.</p> + +<p>"The cook did just right," he said, gravely. +"You've got no business in his galley. A cook is always +boss there. Even the Captain seldom interferes +with him."</p> + +<p>Chris seemed inclined to protest indignantly, but +the old sailor continued.</p> + +<p>"How would you like to be cook an' have some +one poking around an' tellin' you what to do?"</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon you is right," the little darkey +admitted, "I wouldn't stand such doin's. 'Spect<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_51" id="Page_51">[51]</a></span> +dough dat my good clothes is all spoiled. Dat +water was powerful greasy."</p> + +<p>"Better dry them out and lay them away," Walter +suggested. "They are too fine to wear at sea. +You had ought to save them 'till we get in port."</p> + +<p>Both boys were glad when Chris accepted the suggestion. +They could see that the crew regarded the +little fellow in his gay apparel with a contempt and +ridicule that the plucky, loyal little lad did not deserve.</p> + +<p>Under her shortened canvas, the "Beauty" had +dropped to the rear of the fleet. Late in the afternoon +the schooners ahead began to shorten sail. +Soon one rounded up into the wind, dropped anchor +and lowered sail. A mile further on another one +anchored, a mile beyond another took in sail, until +at last the whole fleet was strung out in a long line +reaching many miles North and South.</p> + +<p>The captain held the "Beauty" on her course +until the last schooner was passed then anchored, +lowered sails and made everything snug.</p> + +<p>"We are on the sponging grounds," he explained +to the boys who had been puzzled by the fleet's +maneuvers. "To-morrow we make our first try as +spongers."</p> + +<p>As soon as their supper was finished the boys +strolled forward to view the crew at their meal.</p> + +<p>The Greeks ate in groups of four. Each group +had a great tin pan filled with some kind of stew.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_52" id="Page_52">[52]</a></span> +This they divided into four equal portions with their +big spoons, all eating from the same pan.</p> + +<p>The stew, black bread as hard as a rock, and ripe +olives constituted their meal, but the boys, hearty +eaters themselves, were astounded at the amount of +food each Greek disposed of.</p> + +<p>"I never dreamed a man could stow away so +much grub," Charley remarked. "They are not +eating three meals in one, but six."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_53" id="Page_53">[53]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VII.<br /> + +<small>SPONGING.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> morning sun rose over a scene of bustle and +activity. From the hundred schooners strung out +two or three hundred diving boats with sails hoisted +and engines chugging.</p> + +<p>The young officers were up and away with the +earliest.</p> + +<p>"Go slow," Captain Westfield cautioned them as +they stepped aboard their craft. "Keep your eyes +open an' learn all you can. Don't give any orders +unless they are absolutely needed. But if you have +to give them an order make them obey it, don't let +them trifle with you. You can take Manuel along +if you want to, I reckon I can manage to get along +without him."</p> + +<p>But the boys declined the offer. They had both +taken a great dislike to the suave, smiling Greek.</p> + +<p>The Captain had given their crew general instructions +before they left the schooner and the young +officers had but little to do but signify by waves of +their hands which direction they wished to go.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_54" id="Page_54">[54]</a></span></p> + +<p>All places looked alike to the inexperienced boys, +and as soon as their craft was a quarter of a mile +from the schooner, Charley signed to his crew to +anchor and proceed with their work.</p> + +<p>The divers at once prepared for their descent to +the bottom. The lead was first hove to find out the +depth of the water, which proved to be about thirty-five +feet. Before donning their waterproof suits, +the divers tested the air pump carefully and examined +the air hose minutely, for upon these two things +their lives would depend when once they sank beneath +the surface. While they were putting on the +strange looking suits and heavy leaded shoes, the +crew slung short ladders over the sides. The divers +put on their headpieces last of all, these were large +globe-shaped coverings of metal with two heavy +glasses in front through which to see. But two +divers were to descend at a time. Their places +would be taken by two others at the end of two +hours, which is about as long as one can safely work +at a time beneath the surface. Those in reserve assisted +their companions in adjusting the heavy headpieces. +As soon as the helmets were on they screwed +in the air hose, and connected the other ends to the +pumps. A line by which to lower and raise them +was fastened around each diver's body and he was +then assisted onto the ladder, for it was almost impossible +for them to move in their cumbersome suits +and lead shoes. As soon as they had been helped to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_55" id="Page_55">[55]</a></span> +the lowest step on the ladder, each was given a large +basket to which a long line had been fastened, and +they were slowly and gently lowered to the bottom.</p> + +<p>The young officers watched their operations with +eager interest. What impressed them most was the +vigilant care shown by the divers remaining on +board. One took charge of the tub in which the air +hose was coiled and paid it out carefully as the diver +sank, the other held the life-line instantly ready for +the jerks which would signal to him the wishes of +the one below. Not once did either's eyes shift or +his attention waver from his task.</p> + +<p>"It's easy to see that this is a dangerous business," +Walter remarked.</p> + +<p>"Yes," his chum agreed, "I am beginning to see +that Mr. Williams was right when he said sponging +was a man's game. It certainly takes nerve to descend +like those divers have, knowing that there is +nothing between them and death but that little air +hose. But have you noticed how they are treating +that strange handsome fellow? They all seem to be +afraid to have him near."</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor had approached the men +working the air pumps, apparently with the purpose +of helping with the pumping, but the pumpers drove +him away with menacing gestures and upraised fists. +He moved over near the coiled air hose but the diver +in charge of that met him with a torrent of fiercely-uttered +words and he slunk dejectedly forward, and,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_56" id="Page_56">[56]</a></span> +seating himself by the mast, buried his face in his +hands.</p> + +<p>"Poor chap," Walter remarked, "he seems to be +hated by the whole crew. I wonder what is the +reason."</p> + +<p>"We will find out, I guess, when we meet up with +Mr. Williams again," his chum replied. "He will +likely know, or be able to find out quickly from some +of his crew. But look, we are about to see our first +sponges."</p> + +<p>There had been a couple of quick jerks on the life-line. +The diver holding it called to one of the crew +who seized the line that had been attached to the +basket, and began hauling it carefully in hand over +hand.</p> + +<p>The boys leaned over the side, eager for the first +glimpse of their future cargo. When the basket +came into view they both uttered an exclamation of +disgust and disappointment.</p> + +<p>Instead of bright, clean, yellow sponges with +which they were familiar, the basket was heaped +with what looked like huge lumps of dirty mud.</p> + +<p>The man dumped the contents out on deck and +lowered the basket down again.</p> + +<p>"What greenies we are," Charley said as he +glanced at his chum's crestfallen face. "We might +have known if we had stopped to think, that sponges +have to be cleaned and cured before they look like +those we saw on shore. I expect that pile is worth<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_57" id="Page_57">[57]</a></span> +a lot of money in spite of its unattractive appearance."</p> + +<p>Five times did the basket appear loaded to the +brim before the divers' two hour spell below expired. +As soon as their time was up they were +hauled aboard, their suits removed and the other +two took their places.</p> + +<p>"Whew, but I am getting hungry," Walter exclaimed +as noon time drew near, "and we came off +from the schooner without bringing a lunch with +us."</p> + +<p>"I am glad we did," Charley said. "It's all +right having our meals regular when we are on +board the schooner and out of sight of the crew, but +it would hardly seem right to eat now before these +hungry fellows. I guess we can stand it to go without +dinner of they can stand it to go without both +dinner and breakfast. Besides, I don't believe I +could eat any lunch if we had it. Whew, but that +smell is getting awful."</p> + +<p>The hot sun was getting in its work on the rapidly +increasing pile of sponges on deck. Adhering to +them were multitudes of muscles and little fish +which were beginning to send forth a fearful stench.</p> + +<p>"I am beginning to realize that a sponger's life is +anything but a bed of roses," Walter laughed. "It's +easy to understand now why they only eat one meal +a day."</p> + +<p>The novelty of the diving operations soon wore<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_58" id="Page_58">[58]</a></span> +off and the boys, to pass the time, busied themselves +with an attempt to learn something of the Greek +language. They selected the engineer for their +teacher. He was a young fellow with an intelligent, +good-humored face and seemed to take great interest +in their efforts. Touching different parts of +the boat and engine the boys repeated the English +names for them. The young fellow grasped the idea +instantly and repeated the names in Greek, laughing +heartily over their attempts to pronounce the +words after him.</p> + +<p>In this manner the time passed quickly and pleasantly +and the lads were delighted with the rapid +progress they made.</p> + +<p>"At this rate we will be able to speak the language +a little in a week's time," Charley declared. +"I'm—" but he never finished the sentence.</p> + +<p>From around them rose cries that brought the +lads springing to their feet.</p> + +<p>The crew were all crowded against the rail staring +as if fascinated over the side, while the diver +holding one of the life-lines was hauling it in with +feverish energy.</p> + +<p>As the boys sprang to the rail, the diver's headpiece +appeared above the surface One glance, and +they understood the reason for the sudden commotion—from +the metal helmet dangled a short piece +of severed air hose.</p> + +<p>The luckless man was quickly dragged aboard,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_59" id="Page_59">[59]</a></span> +the head-piece quickly removed, and his rubber +clothing cut away, but his eyes were closed and his +face purple—he was dead. A long, weird, prolonged +wailing came from his shipmates which +arose and fell strangely, like the strains of the +mournful death march.</p> + +<p>The two chums gazed at each other with pale, +horror-stricken faces.</p> + +<p>"Poor fellow," Walter murmured, "His life +went out like a candle in a gale. Alive one minute, +dead the next. What could have cut that hose?"</p> + +<p>"Chafed against a sharp branch of coral or bitten +in two by a shark," Charley replied, sadly. +"Well, I guess it means the last of our sponging, +the other divers will hardly want to go down after +such an accident, and I don't blame them."</p> + +<p>But, to his amazement, as soon as the wailing +chant ceased, one of the remaining divers began +coolly to prepare to take the dead man's place.</p> + +<p>"My, but those fellows have got nerve," he declared, +admiringly, but he stopped the man as he +began to put on his diving suit and by signs ordered +the crew to get up anchor and return to the schooner.</p> + +<p>"It's only a couple of hours to dark and we have +had enough for one day anyway," he remarked to +his chum.</p> + +<p>When the diving boat reached the schooner his +shipmates prepared the dead man for burial. The +body was sewed up in stout canvas and a piece of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_60" id="Page_60">[60]</a></span> +iron fastened to it. It was then gently lowered over +the side and sank slowly beneath the waves.</p> + +<p>With its disappearance all vestige of gloom disappeared +from the crew. The dead man's scanty belongings +were brought forth and auctioned off to the +various bidders, and an hour after the crew were +chatting and laughing with each other as cheerfully +as ever.</p> + +<p>"Mr. Williams was right, this is a man's game, +and a game for rough, fearless men only," Walter +remarked thoughtfully, for a second time.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_61" id="Page_61">[61]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER VIII.<br /> + +<small>TROUBLE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">After</span> the crew had eaten their supper and rested +a bit, the captain had them transfer the sponges +from the diving boat to the deck of the schooner. +The sponges made quite an imposing pile which the +old sailor surveyed with satisfaction. "You've +done well to-day," he remarked, "if every day's +work is as good we'll have a valuable cargo before +our three months are up. I reckon, thar's all of +two hundred dollars' worth of sponges in that +heap."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure that you know how to clean and +cure them right?" Charley enquired.</p> + +<p>"I don't, but Chris knows that part of the business +from A to Z. Where he comes from the people +live by sponging and pearl fishing."</p> + +<p>"Golly, dat's right," observed the little darkey. +"I'se helped my daddy fix sponges many a time. +First off, you'se got to beat de mud out ob dem wid +sticks, den you got to let dem lay foah a day or two +to die, 'cause dey's alive jus' like fishes. When +dey's good an' dead, you puts dem in nets an' hangs +dem ober de side for de water to wash dem out clean.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_62" id="Page_62">[62]</a></span> +Den you dry dem out on deck an' string dem out on +strings 'bout two yards long. Dat makes dem all +ready for market 'cept for clipping de bad parts off +of dem, which is done on shore. Dar ain't nothin' +'bout fixin' up sponges dat dis nigger doan know."</p> + +<p>Just then a small boat came alongside the schooner +and the boys hastened to the side to welcome the +two men it contained. They were the captain and +mate of the schooner anchored nearest to the +"Beauty". Both were young fellows hardly out +of their teens. They introduced themselves as +Steve Ward, and Ray Lowe.</p> + +<p>"We thought we'd drop over and have a little +chat with you," said Ward, who was the captain. +"You, of course, don't realize it yet, but an American +face looks mighty good amongst this army of +Greeks, especially after one has been out for a +month or two. We all start out together but before +the season ends we get pretty widely scattered and +to meet up with another schooner with an American +aboard is like coming across a long-lost brother. +This is my fifth trip and I am getting pretty well +hardened to the loneliness now, but the first time I +was out I nearly went crazy. After we parted from +the rest of the fleet, it was worse than being alone +on a desert island, for I had the misery of seeing +others talk, laugh and enjoy themselves without +being able to understand a word. When, at last, +we came across a ship with someone aboard I could<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_63" id="Page_63">[63]</a></span> +talk to I nearly cried for joy. It seemed so good to +be able to understand and make myself understood +once more." His glance fell upon Manuel +George, who was leaning against the rail, and his +gray eyes narrowed.</p> + +<p>"What made you bring that fellow with you?" +he asked.</p> + +<p>"We had to have someone along who could talk +their lingo," Captain Westfield replied. "Do you +know him?"</p> + +<p>"I don't know anything good of him," said the +other shortly. "I came near killing him once and +I've always half regretted that I didn't do it. It +was on my first trip," he explained. "It was just +such another case as that young fellow's who was +arrested the other day. Although I was captain, +the Greeks owned the schooner, and, because I +was young and inexperienced, they got the idea they +could run over me and do as they pleased. Manuel +was always stirring them up and encouraging them +to disobey orders. One day I had some words with +him about it, and,"—the young fellow's face darkened—"well, +he carries a bullet in his leg yet. The +others set on me and I had to lock myself up in the +cabin. Likely, they would have got me in the end +and thrown me overboard to feed the sharks, but +we happened to come across another schooner and +they had to let me go."</p> + +<p>"He don't want to try any tricks with me," Captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_64" id="Page_64">[64]</a></span> +Westfield declared. "I got him to talk their +lingo but had him sign on as one of the crew. If he +tries to act up, I'll put him at the hardest work on +the schooner."</p> + +<p>"Well, keep your eye on him," advised the other. +"He has never made a trip yet without making +trouble. He's a mighty bad egg and as sly and cunning +as he is mean."</p> + +<p>The two men remained for over two hours, and +from them the little party learned many new and +interesting things about their new business and about +the Greeks.</p> + +<p>"We have no reason to complain of a dull trip +so far," Charley said, when the two Americans had +left. "Only two days out and one of our crew is +dead, another is supposed to be on the watch to make +us trouble, and a third is a mystery worth solving, +judging from the way the others treat him. If +things keep on as they have started, we will have a +voyage exciting enough to satisfy anyone."</p> + +<p>If the lad could have known of the exciting events +soon to follow close on each other's heels, he would +have had even less reason to complain of dullness.</p> + +<p>The next day's sponging was the same as the +first. They seemed to have happened upon a spot +where the sponges were unusually plentiful. The +basket came frequently to the surface loaded with +the big mud-covered masses and by nightfall the +diving boat's deck was well covered. All day the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_65" id="Page_65">[65]</a></span> +two lads persisted in their attempt to learn the Greek +names for the things about them. By night Charley +was able to direct the operation of getting under +way for the schooner. Of course, he was yet unable +to construct sentences in Greek, but he could call the +Greek names for sails, anchor, and different parts of +the rigging and the crew managed to guess the rest. +Though it was a crude and imperfect way of giving +orders, it succeeded better than the slow, imperfect +signs he had been obliged to depend upon before.</p> + +<p>"If we keep on as fast, we will be able to make +them understand us well within two weeks," he declared +gleefully.</p> + +<p>It was still light enough for them to see distinctly +when they reached the schooner, and they looked +about them with regret as they climbed aboard. +Her snow-white decks were filthy from the pounding +out of the sponges, and bulwarks, sails and rigging +were spattered with the foul mud, while the +strong, rank odor of dead fish hung heavy in the air.</p> + +<p>Chris and the captain had just knocked off work. +Their faces, hands and clothing were black as soot. +The old sailor's face showed set and stern through +its coating of mud. He said little until all were +washed up and seated around the supper table.</p> + +<p>"Well, lads, I reckon our troubles have begun," +he remarked, grimly. "Manuel an' I had a row to-day."</p> + +<p>"What about? How did it come out?" the boys +questioned, eagerly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_66" id="Page_66">[66]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I told him to help us with the sponge cleaning +and he refused to do it. When I insisted he flew +into a rage, cursed me, an' shook his fist in my face. +I couldn't stand for that an' he's down in the hold +now with the irons on him."</p> + +<p>"Well, I feel easier with him there than with him +mixing in with the crew," Charley declared.</p> + +<p>"My row with him ain't the worst of the matter," +the old sailor said gravely. "I called on the crew to +help me iron him and they all pretended they didn't +understand my sign, but they knew what I wanted +all right. I had to handle him alone an' we had +quite a struggle before I got the best of him." He +rolled up his sleeve and showed an ugly-looking cut +on his arm. "He came near getting me with his +knife an' I had to give him a couple of taps with a +belaying pin. That cut don't amount to anything, +but what worries me is that the crew stood around +an' watched him try to kill me without interfering—it's +a mighty bad sign."</p> + +<p>"That does look bad," Charley agreed, anxiously. +"I guess we had better keep him a close +prisoner and not let any of the crew go near him, he +might try to stir them up and make things hot for +us."</p> + +<p>"But that means that someone will have to guard +him an' carry his meals to him. It wouldn't do to +have one of the Greeks do it, I reckon."</p> + +<p>"No," Charley agreed, thoughtfully, "but I believe<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_67" id="Page_67">[67]</a></span> +I've got the very man for the job—that handsome +fellow the others seem to hate so. Manuel +tried to kill him and he is not likely to be easy with +him."</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor was at once sent for by +Ben. As soon as he came the captain loaded a tray +with food and a bottle of water and signed for him +to carry it and follow him. Charley and Walter accompanied +the two.</p> + +<p>As they passed along the deck on their way to the +hold, they met angry glances and frowns from the +crew.</p> + +<p>The mysterious sailor was very intelligent and +they soon made him understand that he was to +guard the prisoner. He grinned with enjoyment +and, seating himself a little way from the Greek, +took out his long keen sheath knife and laid it handy +beside him.</p> + +<p>The prisoner's face grew black with rage at sight +of his guard, but he maintained a sulky silence.</p> + +<p>"I guess he's safe enough now," the captain said +as they returned to their cabin. "I believe that +fellow will guard him faithfully. They seem to +hate each other like poison—I wish I knew the reason +for it."</p> + +<p>"It would not seem so strange if the hatred was +confined to him and Manuel, but all the others seem +to share in the feeling," Charley remarked. "It +seems very queer to me."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_68" id="Page_68">[68]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER IX.<br /> + +<small>MANUEL'S RELEASE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Before</span> the boys left the schooner next morning, +the guard they had set over Manuel approached the +captain, and by signs and gestures intimated that +the prisoner wished to speak to him.</p> + +<p>Manuel's sullen demeanor had entirely disappeared +and he looked humble and penitent.</p> + +<p>"I wish to make my most humble apologies to +you, noble captain," he declared. "All night long +I have thought over my hasty actions with shame +and regret. You were right and I wrong. I will +work hard at whatever you set me to do, and in the +future you will have no cause to complain if you +will set me at liberty."</p> + +<p>There were tears in the fellow's eyes and his +voice trembled as he spoke.</p> + +<p>"Stop that blubbering," said the blunt old sailor, +who detested tears in men. "I reckon, if you are +sure that you've learned your lesson an' won't try to +act smart again, I'll set you free; but the minute +you try to start any trouble again, I'll put you down +here for keeps."</p> + +<p>As he removed the irons from the prisoner, the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_69" id="Page_69">[69]</a></span> +strange sailor burst into a torrent of passionate +speech.</p> + +<p>The captain paid no attention to him for he could +not understand a word of it, but Charley, who was +watching closely, saw Manuel give the fellow a +quick glance of sly triumph.</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid you have made a mistake in setting +that fellow free, Captain," the lad said, as they returned +to the deck. "I believe it would have been +wiser to have kept him in irons until we could +touch some port and put him ashore."</p> + +<p>"I never feel like being hard on a man when he's +sorry for what he has done," the old sailor replied. +"I guess it will make the crew feel better tempered +to have him set free. I'm going to put him ashore +at the first port we touch. In the meanwhile we'll +keep him hard at work an' keep a eye on him all the +time."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we had better take him with us and put +him to work at the pump," Walter suggested. +"That's good hard work."</p> + +<p>Charley approved the suggestion, for in spite of +the Greek's seeming repentance, the lad did not trust +him in the least and thought it wisest that he and +the captain should be kept separated for awhile after +their quarrel.</p> + +<p>Manuel went at the hard labor at the air pump +with a willingness and cheerfulness which seemed +to show the sincerity of his repentance. At first, he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_70" id="Page_70">[70]</a></span> +seemed inclined to talk overmuch with the rest of +the crew, but Charley cut short his talkativeness +with a curt command.</p> + +<p>"I believe that fellow is a regular Jonah," he confided +to his chum during the noon hour rest. "Yesterday +and the day before we got lots of sponges, +but we haven't taken in enough this morning to pay +expenses."</p> + +<p>"I guess this part of the ground is getting worked +out, perhaps," Walter replied. "I've noticed several +schooners pulling up anchor and getting under +way."</p> + +<p>His surmise proved correct for during the afternoon +many of the fleet passed them headed North. +Evidently others were finding the ground as poor +as they did.</p> + +<p>Late in the afternoon the captain recalled them +to the schooner with a signal previously agreed +upon,—a flag hoisted to the foremast head.</p> + +<p>"I reckon we'd better be getting under way," +the old sailor said when they got aboard. "I want +to keep with the fleet an' all the schooners seem to +be getting under sail. I've noted the course they +are takin' an' with this wind they'll be a long ways +from us if we wait until morning. I hailed one of +the captains and he said they intended to sail all +night an' anchor an' get to work early in the morning."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_71" id="Page_71">[71]</a></span></p> + +<p>By the time the sails were all hoisted and the +anchor tripped, it had grown quite dark so the +schooner's great side-lights of red and green were +filled, lit, and lashed to the foremast shrouds, for, +with so many boats around them every caution must +be taken to avoid running one down, or being run +down themselves. The crew was divided into three +watches. Of which Walter was to have charge of +the first, from eight to twelve o'clock. Charley to +have command of the second, or middle watch, from +twelve to four o'clock, while the captain would take +the third, or morning watch, from four to eight +<span class="smcap">A. M.</span></p> + +<p>The breeze held steady and strong and the night +passed away without any exciting incident.</p> + +<p>The boys were up again at first peep of day, expecting +to have to start out with the diving boat as +soon as the sun arose. But, when they gained the +deck, they found the "Beauty" still swinging along +on her course and the captain pacing the deck +greatly perplexed.</p> + +<p>"It's mighty queer, but thar ain't one of the fleet +in sight," he exclaimed as he caught sight of the lads. +"I don't understand it at all. Go aloft, Charley, an' +see if you can see any of them."</p> + +<p>The lad swung himself into the shrouds and made +his way up to the mainmast cross trees, but, although +he gazed all around, his eyes met nothing but the +broad expanse of the blue sparkling waters.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_72" id="Page_72">[72]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Maybe we've run them all out of sight during +the night," he suggested when he regained the deck, +but the old sailor shook his head.</p> + +<p>"The 'Beauty's' mighty fast, but she's not +speedy enough to do that," he declared. "Some of +those schooners were ten miles ahead of us when we +started. Besides, I shortened sail as soon as I took +my watch, because I did not want to get in the lead."</p> + +<p>"Perhaps we have dropped away behind the rest," +Walter said, but the others knew that that was impossible. +The "Beauty" was far too fast a boat to +be left so far behind.</p> + +<p>The Captain examined the log. "We have come +a hundred and ten miles," he said. "Do you reckon +either of you boys could have made a mistake in the +course during your watch?"</p> + +<p>"We didn't vary a quarter of a point from the +direction you gave during my four hours," Charley +declared. "I kept watch of the compass most of +the time and the needle held steady at North."</p> + +<p>"I was careful about that, also," Walter said. +"We were headed exactly North during my entire +watch."</p> + +<p>"Well, that compass is true," the captain declared. +"I tested it carefully before we left port. I reckon +thar's only one explanation; the fleet must have +changed their course during the night. We'd better +heave-to until noon when I can take the sun an' tell +exactly where we are at. It ain't no use trying to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_73" id="Page_73">[73]</a></span> +pick up the fleet again, now they are out of sight—it +would be like hunting for a needle in a hay stack."</p> + +<p>The crew were immediately set to taking in sail +and in a few minutes the little ship was lying head +to the wind under reefed foresail sail.</p> + +<p>When the noon hour drew near, Captain Westfield +brought his instruments on deck and prepared to +take an observation of the sun. As soon as he secured +it he went below to work out their position on +the chart.</p> + +<p>When he reappeared his face wore a very puzzled +expression. "Heave the lead and find out how +deep the water is an' what kind of bottom," he said, +briefly.</p> + +<p>Charley took the lead, a heavy cone-shaped piece +of lead, slightly hollowed at the bottom, and with a +long line attached to the small end. Filling the +hollow end with soft soap, he dropped the lead over +the side and let it sink until it struck the bottom. +Then he pulled it aboard again, noting carefully the +water mark on the line and examining the soap to +which some particles of the bottom had adhered.</p> + +<p>"Depth, six fathoms, (36 feet) bottom, soft gray +mud," he announced.</p> + +<p>The captain strode back to the compass and stared +at it with a puzzled frown on his face.</p> + +<p>"We're forty miles from where we should be," +he said as the boys gathered around him, "Sure<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_74" id="Page_74">[74]</a></span> +neither of you boys made a mistake in the course last +night?"</p> + +<p>"Sure," declared both lads positively.</p> + +<p>The four puzzled over the strange situation in +silence for several minutes. Then the captain with +his knife loosened the screws and removed the compass' +face of glass.</p> + +<p>"I wonder how that got there," he suddenly exclaimed.</p> + +<p>Cunningly placed, so as to draw the magnetic +needle West of North was a small bright iron nail.</p> + +<p>"It couldn't have got there by itself," Charley +declared, excitedly. "It must have been put there +by someone while we were all at supper last night."</p> + +<p>"I guess there is no doubt as to who that someone +was," with an inclination of his head towards +Manuel who, standing a little ways off was watching +them closely. The Greek, as soon as he saw the +attention he was receiving, turned and strolled carelessly +forward.</p> + +<p>The captain pondered gravely, "I don't see +what his object was," he said, at last. "If we held +on that course long it would only have carried us +further out into the Gulf, so he couldn't have been +aiming to get us wrecked."</p> + +<p>"He planned to get us separated from the fleet," +Charley declared. "Do you think we could find it +again, captain?"</p> + +<p>The old sailor shook his head. "There's no telling<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_75" id="Page_75">[75]</a></span> +where we are now," he said, gloomily, "we +might hunt for days without coming across them. +If that fellow did put that nail there to make us lose +them, he's succeeded all right."</p> + +<p>"What had we better do, captain?" Walter +asked, anxiously.</p> + +<p>"Well, we aint got no real proof that the fellow +put that nail thar so we can't do anything with him. +It might have been in thar all the time, though I'm +willing to take an oath that the compass was true +when we left port. Thar ain't much chance of picking +up the fleet again an' I don't reckon we'd better +waste time trying it. The lead shows we are still +on the sponge banks an' I reckon we'd best just get +to work, say nothing, an' keep a close watch on that +oil Greek chap."</p> + +<p>The "Beauty" was anchored accordingly, sails +lowered and furled, and everything made snug. As +soon as that was done, the boys ordered their crew +into the diving boat and, running out a little ways +from the schooner, gave the signal to resume the +diving operations.</p> + +<p>By sheer accident, they had chanced upon a spot +rich in sponges and the lads watched with satisfaction +the steady reappearance of the lowered basket.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_76" id="Page_76">[76]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER X.<br /> + +<small>A RASH RESOLVE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys watched Manuel closely throughout the +entire afternoon, but they could detect nothing +amiss in his manner or actions. He did his work +willingly and cheerfully, humming a tune most of +the time, apparently he was at peace with himself +and the world.</p> + +<p>They were not the only ones who watched the +Greek closely. Whenever the lads glanced at the +handsome sailor, they found him gazing intently +at the suspected man, much as a cat watches a +mouse, ready to spring at its slightest movement.</p> + +<p>The boys kept well apart from the crew, watchful +for any threatened outbreak on their part. But the +men seemed so cheerful, willing and contented that +they soon grew ashamed of their distrust.</p> + +<p>Once the handsome sailor approached them +respectfully, hat in hand, and, halting before them, +spoke rapidly in a low voice. The lads shook their +heads to show that they did not understand, and, +with a look of helpless resignation on his face, the +fellow returned to his work.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_77" id="Page_77">[77]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wish we could understand what he says," +Charley said, wistfully. "He, evidently, has something +important he wishes to tell us."</p> + +<p>"We will be able to make out what he says before +long," Walter said, cheerfully. "We are learning +lots of new words every day."</p> + +<p>"Yes, we are getting along pretty well," his chum +agreed, "but we are not picking up the language near +as well as Chris. It's really wonderful how fast he +is learning."</p> + +<p>The little negro and the Greek boy had become +great friends and Chris, naturally quick witted, was +learning with astonishing rapidity to talk to his new +chum.</p> + +<p>"It's the best day we've had yet," Charley declared +as they returned to the schooner in the evening. +"We have got as many sponges this afternoon +as we have during any entire day."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield was elated over their success. +"It's turned out all right after all," he said. +"We've stumbled upon a mighty rich part of the +banks, an' I reckon, we ain't lost the fleet either, +as we feared, thar's some twenty sails coming up +from the South'ard."</p> + +<p>The vessels, which the boys had not noticed before, +were approaching rapidly, coming before the +stiff breeze. Before dark settled down, they were +plainly visible but the eager watchers could not +recognize any of them, they seemed larger schooners<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_78" id="Page_78">[78]</a></span> +than any they had seen in the fleet. The strangers +anchored for the night near the "Beauty" and the +captain got out his night glass and studied them +carefully.</p> + +<p>"They ain't any of the fleet," he declared with +keen disappointment. "They're Spanish smacks +from Cuba. They fish around this coast regularly +every season."</p> + +<p>"Well, they'll be some company, anyway, as long +as they stay near us," Charley said, cheerfully. "I +can speak Spanish if I can't Greek, we can go over +and call on them in the morning. I'd like to go +to-night, but I feel too tired out to move."</p> + +<p>Soon after supper, Manuel approached Captain +Westfield, respectfully.</p> + +<p>"We would like to go aboard the schooners, if +you will permit," he requested. "We are nearly out +of tobacco and the Cubans always carry a lot for +which we can trade."</p> + +<p>The old sailor thought for a few minutes. "You +can go," he said, shortly, "you an' one man. Take +the dingy. I don't want the diving boat used. An' +be sure you're back aboard early."</p> + +<p>The Greek thanked him effusively for the permission, +and, calling one of his shipmates, the two got +the schooner's little boat over the side and sculled +away for the nearest smack.</p> + +<p>"They have got plenty of tobacco," growled the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_79" id="Page_79">[79]</a></span> +captain, as soon as the two were out of hearing. +"Thar was enough sent aboard at Tarpon to last +them for months. I reckon he's figuring on deserting, +that's why I let him go. I'd be willing to lose +the boat and the other man to be well rid of him."</p> + +<p>It seemed that the old sailor was correct for when +eight o'clock came Manuel had not returned.</p> + +<p>"After what happened last night, I don't reckon +it's wise to leave the deck alone," the captain said as +the boys prepared to retire to their bunks. "One +of us had ought to keep watch to see that no one +monkeys with the wheel or compass."</p> + +<p>Walter offered to take the first watch from eight +to twelve, and, leaving him pacing back and forth +aft of the mainmast, the others retired to rest.</p> + +<p>Charley was awakened by a vigorous shaking and +his chum's voice calling to him to get up.</p> + +<p>"My watch so soon," grumbled the lad sleepily, +"Seems like I just got to sleep."</p> + +<p>"It's only eleven o'clock," said Walter in excited +tones, "but Manuel came aboard an hour ago very +drunk. He must have brought liquor with him for +they are all raising merry Ned in the forecastle now. +The captain and Chris are on deck. Hurry up, +there's likely to be trouble any minute."</p> + +<p>Charley slipped hastily into his clothing and securing +his revolver ran on deck. His three companions +with revolvers in their hands were ranged across +the deck just aft of the mainmast. From the forecastle,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_80" id="Page_80">[80]</a></span> +forward, came an uproar of shouting, cursing, +and fighting.</p> + +<p>The old sailor was blaming himself, bitterly. +"I'd ought to have thought of it," he exclaimed, +"Auguident is cheap as water in Cuba an' those +smacks always carry a lot of it to trade off for other +things. What an old fool I was."</p> + +<p>"What shall we do?" Charley asked.</p> + +<p>"Nothing, but let 'em fight it out amongst themselves +an' keep 'em from crowding aft on us. Our +lives wouldn't be worth a pinch of snuff if we went +down to quiet them. If any of 'em tries to come aft +of the mainmast, shoot him."</p> + +<p>The words were hardly out of his mouth when +a figure burst out of the forecastle and came running +aft followed by several others staggering, shouting +and cursing.</p> + +<p>The captain raised his pistol and took deliberate +aim as the flying man drew near.</p> + +<p>"Stop, or I'll shoot," he commanded.</p> + +<p>Charley knocked aside his upraised arm. "Let +him pass," he cried, "it's the strange sailor, they +have been trying to kill him."</p> + +<p>The handsome fellow was bleeding from a dozen +knife wounds, and was breathing short and heavily. +As he reached the little party of chums, he turned +about and faced his pursuers. It was evident that +he did not lack courage.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_81" id="Page_81">[81]</a></span></p> + +<p>The pursuing Greeks stopped short at sight of the +little band stretched across the deck with leveled +revolvers. For a minute they seemed about to dash +forward regardless of consequences, but, after a +moment's hesitation, with a volley of curses they +turned and slunk back to the forecastle. They were +yet sober enough to realize the danger of open +mutiny.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they'll try to bother us," said the +captain with a sigh of relief. "They ain't drunk +enough for that yet, an' I reckon they've about +drank up all their liquor by now. It wouldn't last +long amongst so many of them."</p> + +<p>The strange sailor had sunk to the deck in a dead +faint, and, leaving the boys to guard the deck, the +Captain and Chris carried him below, and, laying +him in one of the bunks, hurried back to their companions.</p> + +<p>"He ain't going to die," the old sailor informed +them. "He's just weak from loss of blood. I +didn't take time to look him over close, but I +counted nineteen knife cuts on his body an' likely +thar's some I didn't notice."</p> + +<p>"We will have to keep him back aft with us. +They would likely kill him if we sent him back to +the forecastle, for he is unable to defend himself +now," Charley said, and his chums agreed with him.</p> + +<p>The uproar in the forecastle continued for a long +time then gradually subsided. Evidently, the crew<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_82" id="Page_82">[82]</a></span> +had disposed of the last of the liquor and its effects +were slowly wearing off.</p> + +<p>Not until four o'clock, however, did the last noise +cease, and the little party of chums remained on +deck until the sun rose, ready for any violence from +the drunken Greeks. Daylight found them pale and +tired from their long, anxious vigil.</p> + +<p>"Better go below, lads, and have a good nap," +the captain advised. "They have all quieted down +and there is no danger of trouble for the present. +They are going to feel mighty sick and weak from +the drink."</p> + +<p>"I'm not going to give them a chance to sleep +off their bad feelings," declared Charley, grimly. +"My crew have got to turn to and work as usual. +I'm going to turn them out as soon as Ben awakes."</p> + +<p>When the little Greek lad appeared, looking pale +and frightened, Charley sent him below to rouse +Manuel.</p> + +<p>The lad, apparently, did not relish the task but he +went, and, after a long time, reappeared accompanied +by the Greek.</p> + +<p>Manuel plainly showed the effects of the liquor. +He looked sick and haggard and one eye was much +discolored from a blow he had received. He was +ready, however, with an excuse for the night's disorder. +"I did my best to stop the noise and trouble, +and it was thus I received a blow in the eye."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_83" id="Page_83">[83]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You were drunk when you came aboard," +accused Walter.</p> + +<p>"I took a drink on the schooner," admitted +Manuel, "only one little drink. It was foolish, for +I am unused to liquor and it went to my legs, but my +head was clear. I regret the disorder of the others."</p> + +<p>There was no doubt in the minds of the captain +and the boys that he was really the author of all +the trouble, but they could not prove it and Charley +dismissed him with a curt command to call the crew.</p> + +<p>They were a sick-looking crowd when they were +at last collected on deck. All showed the effect of +the liquor and many were the black eyes and bruised +faces. Their fighting humor seemed to have departed, +however, and they went about their tasks +quietly, sullenly, and listlessly.</p> + +<p>After they had finished their morning coffee, +Charley ordered his crew into the diving boat and +set out for the spot where they had found so many +sponges.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_84" id="Page_84">[84]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XI.<br /> + +<small>A MYSTERY.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> two boys kept well apart from the crew, +and watched closely for any signs of threatened +trouble, but, although the men looked sullen and +ugly enough for any kind of act, they seemed much +subdued and went about their tasks quietly saying +little, even to each other.</p> + +<p>"I guess we are giving ourselves a lot of worry +without cause," Walter remarked, softly. "Those +fellows seem quiet enough now. It was the liquor +that made them act as they did last night, but they +have drank it all up now and I do not believe we will +have any more trouble with them."</p> + +<p>"I wish I could agree with you," his chum said, +gravely, "but I can't. I believe in the old Latin +proverb—'in vino veritas'—there is truth in wine. +I've always noticed that when a man gets intoxicated, +he reveals just the kind of man he really is. +If he is naturally quarrelsome when sober he is sure +to want to fight when drinking. If he is good-hearted +and kind when sober, he is generally good-humored<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_85" id="Page_85">[85]</a></span> +when drunk. Liquor seems to destroy +a man's caution and make him reveal his real character. +Now these fellows showed plainly their feelings +towards us last night when they were drinking. +To-day they are sober and more cautious, but +I believe they feel just the same towards us. It +only needs some real or fancied wrong to bring their +hatred to the surface again. I believe if we had a +clash with one of them now we would have a first-class +mutiny on our hands; but, I guess, we had +not better do any more whimpering. They will +suspect that we are discussing them and it will not +improve matters any."</p> + +<p>For awhile the sponges came up from below every +half hour, but towards noon a full hour went by +without the basket making its appearance. The +lads, at last, became somewhat alarmed at the delay.</p> + +<p>"Do you suppose they are in any trouble down +below?" Charley enquired of Manuel.</p> + +<p>The Greek shook his head. "They would have +signaled if anything had been wrong. There, they +are signaling now."</p> + +<p>There came several jerks on the life-lines and the +Greeks in charge of them pulled the divers up and +into the boat. The men had been below for only an +hour and the boys were puzzled to account for their +coming up before their time had expired. When +their head-pieces were removed the lads could see +that the divers were greatly excited. They spoke<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_86" id="Page_86">[86]</a></span> +rapidly to those around them, and a hum of excited +conversation arose from the before listless crew.</p> + +<p>"What's the matter?" Charley demanded of +Manuel, who seemed to be the most excited of all.</p> + +<p>"It is nothing," was the quick reply. "The men +grew faint for a minute but they will be all right +soon. That often happens to one when diving."</p> + +<p>The Greek's excitement was too great for such a +trivial cause and Charley decided promptly that he +was lying.</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the divers resumed their head-pieces +and prepared to descend again. As they +stood on the ladders one of the crew handed one of +them a coil of light rope to the end of which was +attached a piece of light wood.</p> + +<p>"What does he want with that buoy?" Charley +demanded, sharply.</p> + +<p>"There's a bad hole in the bottom which he +wishes to mark so that there will be no danger of his +blundering into it," replied Manuel promptly, but, +again, Charley decided that the fellow was lying.</p> + +<p>"There's something in the wind," he remarked +to Walter. "The crew seem greatly excited, and +Manuel, I am sure, is lying."</p> + +<p>A strange change had suddenly taken place in the +crew's manner. Before, they had been silent, sullen +and listless, now, they were animated, their eyes +glittered with excitement, and they chattered back +and forth like so many magpies.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_87" id="Page_87">[87]</a></span></p> + +<p>Manuel evidently noticed that the boys were +watching them closely, for he addressed them in a +low tone and their chattering ceased. They resumed +their work with something like a return of their +former manner, but it was easy to see that their +sullenness was now assumed.</p> + +<p>The lads turned their attention to the course the +diver was taking, and watched for the appearance +of the buoy which would show the whereabouts of +the bad place on the bottom. The bit of wood soon +floated into view not a hundred feet from the boat.</p> + +<p>Apparently, the divers were still suffering from +their faintness, for it was a long time after they +descended before the first basket load of sponges +appeared, and it was nearly an hour before the +second one was hoisted aboard.</p> + +<p>"We are not getting many to-day," Walter +grumbled. "If we don't do better pretty soon, we +had better move and try another place."</p> + +<p>"There is something queer doing," Charley declared. +"Just watch those life-lines and see what +you make of it."</p> + +<p>The ropes which were fastened to the divers +showed plainly the direction taken by the men below. +The lines were kept faintly taut to permit of the +signals being clearly felt, and their slant gave an +accurate idea of just where the divers were working.</p> + +<p>Walter watched for awhile, a puzzled frown +gathering on his face.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_88" id="Page_88">[88]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Why," he exclaimed, "they are right on that +bad part of bottom, and they haven't stirred for the +last fifteen minutes."</p> + +<p>The lads continued to watch the tell-tale lines. +For another fifteen minutes the ropes remained +motionless, then from their twitching it became +evident that the divers were once more moving +around. In a short time thereafter, the usual signal +was given and two baskets of sponges were hoisted +up.</p> + +<p>"That's got me puzzled," said Charley, as the +peculiar performance was repeated. "I guess we +had better appear not to have noticed it. The crew +is not looking at us in a very friendly way."</p> + +<p>The attitude of the Greeks seemed to be growing +hostile. Many were the unfriendly glances they cast +at the two lads and the boys could hear their names +repeated in the low-toned conversation going on.</p> + +<p>The two lads retired to the bow where, though +they effected to be taking their ease, they kept on the +alert for the first signs of trouble.</p> + +<p>Though nothing happened to further arouse their +fears, it was a trying situation and both were glad +when the time came to return to the schooner.</p> + +<p>They found the captain and Chris both tired from +a hard day's labor cleaning sponges. The wounded +sailor was sitting back by the wheel, looking somewhat +pale and haggard, but not a great deal the +worse for his many wounds.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_89" id="Page_89">[89]</a></span></p> + +<p>"His troubles' been sorter praying on his mind all +day," said the captain. "He got a hold of my pad +and pencil this morning an' he's been drawing +pictures of the fight and other things—here's one of +them."</p> + +<p>The old sailor produced a crumpled piece of +paper from his pocket.</p> + +<p>Walter examined the sketch closely. It was not +without a certain cleverness and was better than +one would expect of a humble sailor before the mast. +It depicted a struggle between two groups of men. +In one of the groups, the lad could recognize some +of the faces of the Greeks, who, armed with knives +and clubs, were assailing the other party. As the +lad bent over to examine the other group more +closely, he uttered an exclamation of surprise. At +first glance there was nothing startling about those +whom the Greeks were fighting, but a second glance +showed something familiar about the figures composing +it. He passed the sketch to Charley.</p> + +<p>"What do you make of it?" he asked.</p> + +<p>"Why, that little group is intended to represent +us," his chum exclaimed. "See they are just four +in number. That big one with the beard is meant +for the captain and the little one for Chris, the other +two are you and I. Why, the likeness to us is quite +striking when you look at it closely."</p> + +<p>"I believe he intended this for a warning to us,"<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_90" id="Page_90">[90]</a></span> +Walter declared. "Where are the rest of the things +he drew, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"I threw them all away, I didn't reckon they +meant anything," the old sailor replied, regretfully.</p> + +<p>"Well, never mind," said Charley cheerfully, +"we will get him to draw them over again. He +seems a very intelligent fellow. I wish he could +talk so as to tell us what the crew are saying now. +Just look at him."</p> + +<p>The strange sailor was leaning forward listening +eagerly to the buzz of conversation going on between +the Greeks. The diving boat's crew seemed +to have conveyed the excitement under which they +had been laboring all day to their shipmates who +had remained aboard the schooner. Groups of two +or three were gathered here and there, talking +eagerly together.</p> + +<p>Walter called the little Greek lad to him.</p> + +<p>"What are the men talking about, Ben?"</p> + +<p>The little fellow hesitated before replying. It +was plain that he was greatly troubled and +frightened. "They talk about nothing much," he +stammered.</p> + +<p>Walter was pressing him with further questions +when his chum interfered.</p> + +<p>"It's hardly fair to make him tell," he said. +"It might cause him a lot of trouble. His uncle +is glaring at him now, as though he would like to +kill him."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_91" id="Page_91">[91]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was nothing to be learned by watching the +crew's actions, so, signing to the wounded sailor to +follow them, the four chums descended to the cabin +where the Greek cook had supper waiting for them.</p> + +<p>Charley was unusually quiet during the meal, but +when the Greek cook and Ben had at last retired +carrying the dishes with them, he arose and closed +the cabin door.</p> + +<p>"Captain," he said as he returned to his companions, +"I am going down in a diving suit to-morrow."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_92" id="Page_92">[92]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XII.<br /> + +<small>IN A DIVING SUIT.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> old sailor stared at Charley as though he +feared the lad had taken leave of his senses.</p> + +<p>"Why, you must be crazy," he exclaimed. "You +don't know anything about that kind of diving."</p> + +<p>"I fancy there is not much to learn about it," +Charley replied. "I've been watching the divers +closely and it appears very simple. The main thing +seems to be to keep the air hose clear. I've been +wanting to go down ever since the first day, and +the strange way the crew have acted to-day has +decided me to try it. I want to see what it is that +has so excited them."</p> + +<p>"It's a fool notion and I ain't going to let you +do it," the captain stormed, but Charley only +grinned, cheerfully.</p> + +<p>"It's no use scolding, Captain, I've quite made +up my mind to try it. I've been thinking it over the +whole day."</p> + +<p>"I say you sha'n't do it," roared the old sailor. +"I'll put you in irons first, I'm captain of this +schooner."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_93" id="Page_93">[93]</a></span></p> + +<p>"But I'm captain of the diving boat," Charley +reminded him with a grin, "If anyone interferes +with my doings on my own ship it's mutiny, you +know."</p> + +<p>"Walt, say something to get him out of that fool +notion," pleaded the old sailor, helplessly.</p> + +<p>Walter turned to his chum with a twinkle in his +eye, "If you go down, I'm going too," he said, +decidedly.</p> + +<p>"You're two young lunatics," the captain declared, +wrathfully. "You're bound to always run +yourselves into danger whenever you get a show. +Neither one of you will ever live to see twenty."</p> + +<p>But, although he fumed and threatened for a long +time, the matter ended, as was always the case +when the boys had determined upon a thing, in +his, at last, giving a grudging consent to their plan.</p> + +<p>Chris had followed his little friend Ben on deck +as soon as he finished his supper, but soon after the +discussion was ended he returned below grumbling.</p> + +<p>"Dat white child ain't no fitten company to-night," +he declared. "He acts plum scart to death +an' won't talk none tall."</p> + +<p>"You go up and stay around the wheel, 'till we +come up," the captain ordered. "I thought you were +there all the time or I'd been up myself, I don't want +none of those fellows fooling around the compass."</p> + +<p>When Chris had retired, still grumbling, Walter +brought out a pad and pencil and handed them to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_94" id="Page_94">[94]</a></span> +the sailor who had been watching their faces closely +during their animated debate.</p> + +<p>The man seized them eagerly and bending over +the pad began to draw slowly with awkward, clumsy +fingers. When the sketch was finished he tore off +the sheet of paper and handed it to Charley whom +he seemed to recognize as the real leader of the +little party.</p> + +<p>The lad examined the sketch with eager interest. +"He must be a very cheerful sort of fellow," he +remarked, as he passed it to his chum. "First, he +prophesies a fight with the crew, and, now, he has +got us all shipwrecked. Can't say much for his skill +with the pencil though; that hulk does not look +much like our pretty 'Beauty'."</p> + +<p>The rude sketch pictured a forlorn, dismasted +wreck, covered with seaweed and with one side +badly stove in.</p> + +<p>The sailor had immediately commenced upon another +picture which he soon passed over.</p> + +<p>The boys looked it over but could not decide what +it was intended to represent.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a box full of crackers," Charley +said with a grin. "Well, if he's decided to have us +shipwrecked, it's thoughtful of him to provide us +with something to eat."</p> + +<p>But the sailor did not seem to regard it as any +laughing matter. He watched their expressions<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_95" id="Page_95">[95]</a></span> +with a face full of concern, and, when Walter shook +his head to show that he did not understand the +sketch, he laid aside the pad with a heavy sigh.</p> + +<p>"He has given it up," Charley said. "We had +better go to bed, I guess we have a hard day ahead +of us to-morrow."</p> + +<p>Chris was recalled from the deck and Walter +took his place while the others turned into their +bunks and were soon fast asleep. At midnight he +awakened Charley and at four o'clock Charley was +relieved by the captain. The watches passed away +without any alarm, but one thing struck both of +the lads as being curious. All during their watches +three or four of the Greeks remained on deck instead +of seeking their bunks as they usually did right +after eating supper. They sat around up by the +forecastle smoking and talking quietly together and +the boys came to the conclusion that they were +merely wakeful from the effects of the liquor they +had drank the night before.</p> + +<p>The boys looked longingly at the tempting breakfast +served by the Greek cook, but as they had +decided to make the descent to the bottom that +morning they were obliged to be content with a cup +of coffee.</p> + +<p>The captain and Chris followed them aboard the +diving boat. "We're going with you," the old +sailor explained. "It's a risky thing you're planning +to do an' I'd be too nervous and anxious about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_96" id="Page_96">[96]</a></span> +you to stay on the schooner. She will be all right +without us for a little while."</p> + +<p>Manuel seemed to note the presence of the captain +and Chris with satisfaction. Before the boat was +shoved off from the schooner, he called the cook +to the rail and conversed with him a few minutes in +low tones.</p> + +<p>But his satisfaction changed to frowning anger +when the boys began to don the diving suits.</p> + +<p>"You are foolish to attempt to go down, young +sirs," he said, angrily. "It is dangerous, very +dangerous."</p> + +<p>"We are the only ones at all likely to suffer," +Charley replied shortly. "Tend strictly to your +pumping, when we think we need advice, we will ask +you for it."</p> + +<p>Before his head-piece was adjusted, he found +opportunity to whisper to Walter. "We won't be +able to talk when we get below, so I want you to +follow me and do just what you see me do."</p> + +<p>"I will," promised his chum. "My, don't these +things feel queer. I can hardly lift my feet, they +are so heavy. They make me feel helpless as a +little baby."</p> + +<p>The divers adjusted the helmets to the lads' heads +and, assisting them to the rail, helped them down +the ladder, and lowered them gently to the bottom.</p> + +<p>Charley laughed to himself as he caught sight +of Walter in the clear water. His chum looked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_97" id="Page_97">[97]</a></span> +like some strange monster in the grotesque diving +suit. He waved his hand to him and Walter placed +one great paw over his helmet where his mouth was +supposed to be, to show that he was endeavoring +politely to stifle a laugh.</p> + +<p>But the boys' merriment at each other's grotesque +appearance was quickly lost in admiration of the +strange scene about them.</p> + +<p>It was as though they were standing in the midst +of a beautiful garden. Here and there were patches +of soft white bottom, like winding paths amongst +the marine growth. On every side of the bare places +rose lace-like sea fans of purple, yellow, and red, +and feather-like sea plumes swaying gently to and +fro to the motion of the water caused by the lads' +descent. At their bases lay scattered multitudes of +shells of every conceivable shape, size, and hue, +while, towering far above the riot of color, rose +mighty trees of snow-white coral among the +branches of which hovered golden, silver, crimson, +and every shade of fish, great and small, their fins +flashing gracefully as they darted to and fro.</p> + +<p>For some moments, the lads stood motionless +drinking in the beauty of the wonderful garden, but +they had not descended merely to admire and +Charley, after a long look around, hauled gently on +the life-line until he had some hundred feet coiled +neatly at his feet. Walter, though not comprehending +his chum's plan, followed his example. The<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_98" id="Page_98">[98]</a></span> +ruse was to serve a two-fold purpose, first to lead +those on the diving boat to think that the two were +a considerable distance from the boat, and, second, +to deceive them as to the real direction taken by +those below.</p> + +<p>As soon as Walter had got his life-line neatly +coiled down, Charley turned at right angles from +the spot and moved slowly forward for the place +where he calculated lay the supposed bad place in +the Gulf's bottom.</p> + +<p>He was surprised to find that he could walk with +perfect ease and comfort. The suit, which had been +so heavy and cumbersome above the surface, now +rested on him lightly as a feather. He could have +walked with considerable speed had it not been for +the care he had to take to keep his life-line free and +clear from the numerous branches of coral. He +watched Walter anxiously to see that he used the +same care with the rope upon which their very lives +depended and he was relieved to see that his chum +used every possible precaution.</p> + +<p>Although the water was clear as crystal, neither +lad could see far ahead at that depth below the +surface for it was too far for the sun's light to +penetrate brightly. Charley was almost upon the +rope with its floating buoy above before he perceived +it. He moved forward now with the greatest +caution for, if Manuel's statement was true, a hasty +step might plunge him suddenly into a nasty hole or<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_99" id="Page_99">[99]</a></span> +a dangerous patch of quicksand. But the bottom +did not seem any different from that over which +they had passed. The rope was fastened to a +branch of coral where there was no indication of +a hole or quicksand, but, a little beyond where the +rope was fastened, the lad could see dimly a large +black mass rising up from the bottom. Towards it +he slowly made his way, followed by his chum.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_100" id="Page_100">[100]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIII.<br /> + +<small>A CLOSE CALL.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Charley's</span> eyes were becoming accustomed to +the semi-gloom and a few steps forward gave him a +clear view of the dark object. One glance, and he +turned to his chum with a cry which was lost in his +muffling helmet.</p> + +<p>Before the two lads lay the wreck of a once +stately ship, her masts broken short off and a great +gaping hole in her side. She had evidently lain +long in her bed amongst the coral and sponges for +long tendrils of sea moss streamed out from her +barnacle-covered sides.</p> + +<p>Someone had been there before them for the +moss and marine growth had been scraped from the +vessel's stern revealing the name, "Golden Hope".</p> + +<p>Charley turned from the spelling out of the +indistinct letters to see his chum beckoning to him +wildly and he hurried to his side.</p> + +<p>Walter was stooping over an opened box partly +filled with what had once been shining gold pieces +but which were now tarnished and almost unrecognizable<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_101" id="Page_101">[101]</a></span> +in their coat of gray slime. The box had +been recently torn open as was evident from the +freshly-splintered wood.</p> + +<p>Charley sat down on the box's edge and did some +rapid thinking. The crew's excitement was now +accounted for. They had not come upon a rich +bed of sponges as he had suspected but had discovered +a treasure such as men for ages have fought, +struggled, and died to attain. The half emptied +box showed that the divers had already begun to remove +the gold. For a moment, the lad was puzzled +to know how they had been able to bring up what +was missing without its being seen. There were no +pockets to the diving suits and they could have +carried but a few pieces at a time in their closed +hands. A moment's reflection, however, brought +him to the only possible explanation; the gold must +have been sent up in the sponge basket hidden +amongst the lumps of mud from which it could +have been removed by the crew without much risk +of discovery. But it was not the removal of the +gold which gave the quick-witted lad the most concern. +The amount taken by the Greeks was likely +but a mere trifle when compared with that which remained. +It was the effects the discovery of such a +treasure would have upon an already unruly crew +that he feared. As he had said to Walter but the +day before, he believed it needed but a trifle to fan +the Greeks' growing discontent into open mutiny.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_102" id="Page_102">[102]</a></span> +Here was riches enough to tempt the most steady +band of sailors and it was but reasonable to suppose +that it would tempt the lawless Greeks to deeds of +violence and bloodshed. These thoughts surged +through the lad's mind in far less time than it has +taken to tell of them. He would have liked to have +talked the matter over with his chum and settled +upon the wisest plan to follow, but that was impossible +below the surface and signs were useless to +convey exact ideas. He must decide alone upon +their immediate course of action and trust to +Walter's quick wit to fall in with what he decided +upon.</p> + +<p>Arising he turned to his chum and laid one finger +across his lips. Walter nodded his ponderous head-piece +to show that he understood the sign for silence +regarding their discovery.</p> + +<p>Taking up his sponge basket, Charley retraced his +steps to the spot where they had descended followed +by his observant chum. Here the sponges grew in +abundance and he at once began to fill his basket, +an example which Walter immediately followed.</p> + +<p>As he bent over to tear up an unusually large +sponge he became suddenly sensible of an agitation +of the water near him. Straightening up, he stood +frozen to his tracks with fear and horror. Not ten +feet from where he stood lay a gigantic shark, its +belly gleaming white through the clear water. Its +little green eyes were fixed upon him with a wicked<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_103" id="Page_103">[103]</a></span> +unblinking stare. He let the basket drop from his +grasp and flung up his arms with an unreasoning +instinct to protect his head from the impending +attack. At his sudden movement the great fish +darted away. Evidently, it was equally as +frightened of the strange unknown monster it had +encountered.</p> + +<p>The shock had left the frightened lad weak and +trembling and he had to rest a few minutes before +he could resume the filling of his basket.</p> + +<p>As he placed the last sponge in the basket he +turned to signal to his chum to ascend, but Walter +was already gone, his figure, grotesque in the diving +suit, was already well up from the bottom and +shooting up with astonishing swiftness. At the +same moment Charley became aware of a strange +sickening sensation. He was choking and gasping +for breath. Before he could realize what had happened +the frightful sensation had passed and he +was able to breathe fully and freely, and he felt +himself being pulled swiftly to the surface.</p> + +<p>In a moment he was hoisted above the surface, +hauled aboard the boat and his helmet removed. +The captain, white-faced and shaken was leaning +against the mast his revolver in his hand. Chris, +ashen-hued, and a sailor, was still pumping faintly. +Close beside the air pump lay Manuel in apparent +unconsciousness.</p> + +<p>"What's happened?" Charley cried.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_104" id="Page_104">[104]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Manuel keeled over in a fit or something," said +the captain, brokenly. "I thought you would both +be dead before we could get you to the surface. It +seemed ages before I could get Chris to the pump +and the fellows to hauling you up. They seemed +to move mighty slow 'till I threatened to shoot. +They maybe didn't understand what I said but the +sight of the gun made 'em more lively," he concluded, +grimly.</p> + +<p>Charley walked over to the prostrate Greek and +stood gazing down at his upturned face.</p> + +<p>"He has no business to faint when he's working +the air pump," he said savagely. "I guess I'll kick +him a good hard one in the face for punishment."</p> + +<p>The manly lad had no such intention of carrying +out such a brutal threat but he wanted to test +whether the treacherous Greek was, as he suspected, +really shamming.</p> + +<p>The prostrate man's features twitched, he sighed +heavily and rolled over on his side, Charley's suspicions +were confirmed.</p> + +<p>"Captain," said the lad distinctly, "if anything +happens to Walter and I when we are below the +surface, I want you to shoot this man without the +slightest hesitation. He is the only one who can +understand your orders and he must be made +responsible for our safety."</p> + +<p>"I'll shoot him the first time anything goes +wrong," the captain declared wrathfully, as he<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_105" id="Page_105">[105]</a></span> +caught the wink of Charley's eye. "I feel like +killing him now, for the fright he gave me."</p> + +<p>The shamming Greek did not seem to relish this +threatening talk. He showed signs of surprisingly +rapid recovery. In a few minutes he was able to sit +up and look around.</p> + +<p>"I am overjoyed to find you both alive," he said +faintly to the two boys. "Everything grew suddenly +black before me when I was pumping and I +knew no more. It is my heart, it troubles me at +times. You young gentlemen must go down no +more, it is too risky."</p> + +<p>"We have had enough of it for to-day, but we +may try it again to-morrow," Charley replied, +cheerfully. "It is very beautiful and interesting +down below."</p> + +<p>"I hope you avoided the bad place on the +bottom," said the Greek, anxiously. "The divers +say it is a dangerous hole."</p> + +<p>"You must think we are fools to venture near +such a place," said Charley, indignantly, and the +man looked greatly relieved.</p> + +<p>Above all, the prudent lad wished to keep the +crew from thinking that he and Walter had come +upon the treasure. As long as they believed them +ignorant of its existence they would likely continue +the work of secretly removing it without open +violence.</p> + +<p>He could not talk over the matter with his chums<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_106" id="Page_106">[106]</a></span> +without danger of being overheard, and he was +forced to appear unconcerned and look on with indifference +while the divers sent up basket after +basket of sponges, in every load of which he was +convinced was hidden several hundred dollars of +the gold coins.</p> + +<p>He greatly admired Walter's manner. The lad +chattered over the beautiful gardens they had seen +below without a hint in his voice or manner of the +secret they had stumbled upon.</p> + +<p>From time to time the crew shot glances of scowling +suspicion at the little group, but they were +evidently reassured by the boys' cheerfulness and +apparent unconcern.</p> + +<p>It was like sitting beside a powder mine with a +lighted fuse in it, and both lads were greatly relieved +when the long day dragged away to its close +and the diving boat was headed back for the +schooner.</p> + +<p>They were met at the schooner's rail by the cook +who seemed greatly excited and who greeted them +with a torrent of rapidly spoken words.</p> + +<p>Manuel listened with a look of sadness, real or +assumed, on his face.</p> + +<p>"He says," he interpreted swiftly, "that the +wounded man went suddenly crazy this morning +and flung himself into the sea."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_107" id="Page_107">[107]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIV.<br /> + +<small>THE DISCUSSION.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> chums looked at each other in silent comprehension. +There was not a doubt in the mind of +either that the sailor had been made away with during +their absence from the ship. They recalled +Manuel's talk with the cook before they left the +schooner and the look of satisfaction in his face +when he learned that they were all going on the +diving boat. Even the captain was not slow to grasp +the horrible truth.</p> + +<p>"It's a terrible business, but don't let on that you +suspect them," he whispered. "We've got to have +a long talk and decide what it's best to do." To +Manuel, he said, curtly, "I reckon, it's the fellow's +own business if he wanted to drown himself, so you +ain't got no cause to grieve. Better divide his +things up amongst the crew."</p> + +<p>Although they were eager for a talk alone, the +four lounged carelessly about the deck, striving to +appear unconcerned, until the Greek boy summoned +them to supper below. They talked cheerfully until<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_108" id="Page_108">[108]</a></span> +the cook had retired bearing the empty dishes with +him. Then Charley arose and noiselessly closed +the cabin windows and door so that their words +would not reach the deck. Returning to his seat, +he called the pale-faced little Greek lad to him, and, +resting his hand on his head, said kindly,</p> + +<p>"Ben, we are not going to repeat anything you +say to us, and we want you to tell us just what has +been troubling you the last few days."</p> + +<p>The little lad burst into tears, "They'll kill me," +he sobbed, "they'll kill me."</p> + +<p>"They will never know you told us," Charley +assured him. "We will never let anyone know you +told us."</p> + +<p>"They are going to kill you all," faltered the boy +as soon as he could control his sobs.</p> + +<p>"Why do they want to kill us," Charley questioned.</p> + +<p>"My uncle makes them mad. When you give +orders he adds lots of bad names and swear words +to them. He tells the crew that you always take +that sailor's part. He tells them you're going to +have them all put in jail when you get back to Tarpon. +He tells them you love that sailor and hate +Greeks."</p> + +<p>"But why did they hate that sailor so?" Walter +questioned.</p> + +<p>"He Turk," explained the lad. "Greeks hate +Turks."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_109" id="Page_109">[109]</a></span></p> + +<p>The chums glanced at each other in swift comprehension. +They knew of the deadly hatred that +existed between the two races. A hatred that had +led to the bitter war in which the Greeks had been +badly beaten. They understood now why the handsome +sailor had been shunned by all his shipmates. +They could see, too, how the wily Manuel had used +their defense of the man to arouse the crew's resentment +against them. The cunning Greek had woven +about them a net of lies which it would be impossible +to explain away.</p> + +<p>"Then they find gold," Ben continued, "that +makes them crazy. Manuel tells them to leave you +alone if you don't find out about the money, but kill +you if you do."</p> + +<p>"The infernal rascal," exploded the captain. +"He goes in irons and down in the hold to stay 'till +we get to port."</p> + +<p>"Don't do that!" cried the alarmed Greek lad. +"They kill you right off if you do."</p> + +<p>"One thing more," said Charley, as the little +fellow's tears began to flow afresh. "Who killed +that sailor?"</p> + +<p>But Ben did not know although it was evident +that he did not doubt that the man had been killed.</p> + +<p>Charley waited until the lad had dried his tears, +then let him go with the caution to tell none of the +crew that he had told them.</p> + +<p>"We are in the tightest fix of our lives," he declared,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_110" id="Page_110">[110]</a></span> +when Ben had gone. "It seems, from what +he says, that we are safe so long as they do not +suspect that we know anything about the gold but +I fancy that Manuel suspects that we have found it +and I do not believe we can count on their being +willing to let us reach port alive. The question is, +what had we better do."</p> + +<p>"I don't understand all this talk about gold," said +the captain.</p> + +<p>The boys hurriedly told of the discovery they +had made while the old sailor listened with sparkling +eyes.</p> + +<p>"Boys," he exclaimed, when their tale was concluded, +"you've found what will make rich men of +us all. I remember the excitement caused by the +loss of that ship. It happened twelve years ago. +For months tugs and steamers were scouring the +Gulf searching for her. She had cleared from New +Orleans for New York with two million dollars +in gold aboard."</p> + +<p>"She might as well contain two million toothpicks +so far as we are concerned," said Charley, +impatiently. "I'd give up every cent of it willingly +to be safe in port this minute."</p> + +<p>The captain, brought abruptly back to a realization +of their desperate situation, thought deeply for +several moments before he spoke. "We had ought +to be able to hold our own against them fellows," he, +at last, observed. "We are well armed and I don't<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_111" id="Page_111">[111]</a></span> +believe they have got any weapons except their sheaf +knives which ain't no good except at close quarters."</p> + +<p>"It is not open violence but treachery that I fear," +Charley explained. "We have had two samples already +of the way they work. First in that stoppage +of the air hose and, second, in the making away of +that sailor. No, that Manuel is too cunning a rascal +to risk open rebellion when he can accomplish his +ends without any personal risk."</p> + +<p>"Why not let them continue to get up the gold +and hide it as they have been doing?" Walter +suggested. "We can pretend that we do not know +what is going on. Then when we get to port we +can turn them over to the authorities and recover +the money without any trouble."</p> + +<p>Charley shook his head doubtfully. "That will +not do," he said. "I am as convinced as I am that +I am living, that we would never reach port alive. +Manuel is too wise to take any chances and he +knows that they could not remove such a large +amount of gold from the schooner without arousing +suspicion. I believe he has entrusted the crew to +spare us for the present only because he thinks that +some of the fleet might happen along and grow +curious if we were all missing. Besides, it is +doubtful if any of them know enough about navigation +to sail the 'Beauty' home. Us boys, he probably +will not hesitate to remove at any time if he can +give the act the appearance of accident, like what<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_112" id="Page_112">[112]</a></span> +occurred to-day. The captain, he will likely permit +to remain alive until near port. He will have a +long story made up to account for our disappearance +and the gold will likely be well hidden amongst the +ballast from where he can remove it without exciting +comment so long as we are not on board."</p> + +<p>The lad spoke confidently for he was putting himself +in the place of the cunning Greek and reasoning +just what he would do in a like position.</p> + +<p>"I've got it," exclaimed the captain in triumph. +"When they are asleep we'll batten down the forecastle +hatch on them and keep them there until we +get to port. We four can work the schooner in, I +guess."</p> + +<p>"I tell you, you don't realize what a cunning +rascal that fellow is," Charley declared in reluctant +admiration. "He has provided against just such +an attempt. I did not understand the reason for it +last night, but I noticed that all during my watch +on deck there were three or four men hanging +around the deck up forward. It's a great stake +they are playing for and they are not taking the +slightest chances."</p> + +<p>"I noticed the men hanging around," admitted +the captain, "but I didn't think much of it at the +time. Let's have your plan, if you've got one, lad."</p> + +<p>"I'm afraid we can't get out of this hole without +some violence and danger," Charley replied. "I +have been thinking over it all day and this is the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_113" id="Page_113">[113]</a></span> +only thing I can think of that seems to offer any +hope of success. First thing in the morning Walter +and I must descend to the wreck again and bring up +enough gold to pay off the men when we get to +port. It's a risky thing to do, but it is necessary to +carry out my plan. You see," he paused to explain, +"the men were shipped for three months and they +could demand pay for that time. We haven't got +the money and we have not gathered up enough +sponges yet to make up so large an amount. They +could tie the schooner up for their wages and make +us a lot of trouble and expense, a thing Manuel +would be sure to do."</p> + +<p>"But they have got a lot of gold which belongs to +us, already," Walter suggested.</p> + +<p>"We would have hard work to prove that it is +ours, and it would mean a lot of delay," replied his +chum quickly.</p> + +<p>"Go on with your plan, lad," said the captain, +who perceived that Charley had thought over all +sides of the question with his usual clearness.</p> + +<p>"After we have brought up the money. We will +use their own plan for bringing it up without its +being noticed—we will hang around and let them +go on with the work as usual all day, for it would +not do to fight it out on the diving boat. When we +get back to the schooner at night, we will bring +matters to a head. We will make them get up +anchor and sails and head back for Tarpon. There's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_114" id="Page_114">[114]</a></span> +bound to be trouble and plenty of it but we'll be +prepared for it and Tarpon is only two days' sail. +What do you think of the plan?"</p> + +<p>He did not have to wait long for a chorus of +objections.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_115" id="Page_115">[115]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XV.<br /> + +<small>A DESPERATE PLAN.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">I don't</span> see that your plan is any better than +mine," Walter objected.</p> + +<p>"To tarry along while they remove the gold +would give them time enough to remove us one by +one," Charley replied, "While by doing as I have +suggested they will have but little chance for +treachery, and, although we will be sure to have +trouble with them as soon as we order them to get +up anchor, I think we can manage to keep the upper +hand of them for the short time it will take to +reach Tarpon."</p> + +<p>"Golly, dis nigger plum hates to run off an' lebe +all dat gole," Chris observed.</p> + +<p>"We'll come back for it," Charley declared. "As +soon as we have paid off the Greeks and got rid of +them, we'll pick a crew of Americans and hurry +back."</p> + +<p>"And while we are wasting time in getting a new +crew, the Greeks will have spread the news and a +dozen boats will be here before we can get back."</p> + +<p>"You forget that the captain is the only one who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_116" id="Page_116">[116]</a></span> +knows where we are by the latitude and longitude. +Without knowing that, fifty boats might hunt for +a month without seeing that little buoy. It would +be like looking for a needle in a haystack."</p> + +<p>"Hang that pesky Greek," exclaimed the captain. +"He asked me this morning for the schooner's position, +an' I gave it to him."</p> + +<p>Charley's face fell, "That fellow seems to think +of everything," he sighed. "But it's hard to get an +exact position by latitude and longitude alone, isn't +it, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"A navigator is lucky if he hits within four or +five miles of the place he's aiming for. Of course +it can be done if one is extra careful, but I could +not swear to our exact position on the chart now, +'though I reckon I could come within a couple of +miles of it."</p> + +<p>"Good," Charley exclaimed, "I guess, we can +make it impossible for them to find the wreck again, +if they should manage to get back before us. It +will mean a little change in my plan, though. +Instead of getting off to-morrow night, we will have +to wait until the next morning." He hastily outlined +his amended plan, which, after they had discussed +it carefully, his companions agreed was as +promising as any they could think of.</p> + +<p>They had hardly finished their discussion when +there came a knock at the cabin door and Manuel +entered, smiling.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_117" id="Page_117">[117]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I wished to enquire if the young gentlemen +intend to go down in the suits again to-morrow?" +he said, suavely.</p> + +<p>"We haven't decided yet," Charley said, carelessly, +"Why do you wish to know?"</p> + +<p>"Because, if you are, the air hose had better be +greased. If it is left dry for long the rubber sometimes +cracks and makes leaks."</p> + +<p>"Then have it well greased," the captain ordered.</p> + +<p>"I guess he's afraid of being shot if anything +happens, an' is taking every precaution," chuckled +the captain when the Greek had retired.</p> + +<p>"Perhaps," agreed Charley, doubtfully, "but, I +confess, I am afraid of that fellow. I'll certainly +look over that hose carefully before I go down to-morrow."</p> + +<p>When they ascended to the deck, which they had +forgotten to have watched in the excitement of their +discussion, they found Manuel and two of the +divers busily engaged in greasing the rubber air +hose with bacon slush from the cook's galley.</p> + +<p>Charley's was the first watch on deck and, long +after his companions had retired to their bunks, he +paced back and forth aft of the main mast pondering +thoughtfully over the plan he had suggested. +It was the best he could conceive under the circumstances +but he realized that its execution would be +attended with the gravest dangers. Most of all, he +dreaded the proposed descent to the bottom for the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_118" id="Page_118">[118]</a></span> +gold. He was convinced that Manuel had hit upon +some scheme to get rid of him and Walter without +danger to himself. Again and again the lad's +thoughts came back to the greasing of the hose. If +the operation was so important, why had the divers +not done it before—They were not the kind of men +to take any unnecessary risks in their dangerous +work below the surface. He had often noted the +care with which they had examined hose and pump +before each descent.</p> + +<p>But, while the lad puzzled over the matter, he did +not neglect to keep a watchful eye upon the three +or four Greeks who lingered on the forward deck. +If he had needed any reminder of the peril of their +situation, it would have been found in the sight of +those watchful, restless figures.</p> + +<p>Near the end of his watch, he gave vent to a low +exclamation—He had discovered the reason for +the greasing of the hose. For a few minutes he +was appalled by the cunning fiendishness which had +prompted the act. The two hoses lay coiled close +together in great heaps on deck. Sauntering over to +them, the lad stooped over each pile for a second, +then, straightening up, he resumed his slow steady +pacing.</p> + +<p>At midnight he awoke Walter to take his place. +"I've solved it," he told him.</p> + +<p>"Solved what?" asked Walter, sleepily.</p> + +<p>"Their reason for greasing the hose."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_119" id="Page_119">[119]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What is it?"</p> + +<p>"To attract sharks and lead them to bite it in +two."</p> + +<p>"The fiends!" Walter cried as the devilish +ingenuity of the plot dawned upon him. "What +are you going to do about it?"</p> + +<p>"Nothing, until we are ready to descend," his +chum replied, "then it will be too late for them to +practice another surprise for us."</p> + +<p>"Are you sure you are right," asked Walter, +doubtfully. "They are not sure that we are going +to descend, you know."</p> + +<p>"I think Manuel feels pretty confident that we +will. If we fail to do so, he likely will find some +excuse for replacing the greased hose with new ones. +You can bet, he's got it all figured out. He is the +brainiest villain I ever met up with. Better hurry +on deck now, and keep a close watch out. There's +no telling what other scheme he's got hatched up."</p> + +<p>Although he retired to his bunk at once, Charley +lay long awake. The morrow would be filled with +danger and his nerves were already growing tense +for the struggle which he foresaw. The Captain +had relieved Walter on deck before he at last fell +into a troubled slumber from which he awoke just +as day was beginning to break.</p> + +<p>By the time it was light enough to see, he was up +and dressed and making preparations for the carrying +out of his hazardous plan. From the lazerette,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_120" id="Page_120">[120]</a></span> +he procured a long coil of light rope which he +placed in one corner of his cabin. He next opened +up his valise and got out the ammunition he had +purchased in Tarpon and a small, but excellent +pocket compass. These he placed in his bunk where +they would be handy if needed quickly.</p> + +<p>When breakfast was over, the diving boat was +brought alongside and all got on board except the +cook and four men left to take care of the schooner +and clean the sponges gathered the previous day.</p> + +<p>"We have decided to go down and have one more +look at those sea gardens," Charley told Manuel +when the sponging ground was reached. "They are +beautiful enough to invite another visit."</p> + +<p>The Greeks' face expressed satisfaction. "They +are beautiful," he agreed, "but the young gentlemen +are rash to go down. Let the divers take the +risks—they are paid to do it."</p> + +<p>"We will be very careful," Charley said, cheerfully. +"Walt, we had better look over the hose +before we go down, the divers always do."</p> + +<p>The greased hose had been recoiled in the tubs +and the boys proceeded to overhaul them, foot by +foot, searching them closely for cracks or punctures.</p> + +<p>Walter was puzzled to comprehend his chum's +plan. After what he had discovered, surely he did +not intend to risk using the dangerous things, but he +was well enough acquainted with Charley's shrewdness +to hold his tongue and keep his face from betraying<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_121" id="Page_121">[121]</a></span> +his uneasiness. He felt sure that there was +a good reason for his chum's actions. He had but +just reached this decision when he came upon a +gapping hole in the hose. It looked much as though +it had been cut in two with a sharp knife.</p> + +<p>"Here's a bad place," he announced. "It's lucky +I found it. Air can't be pumped through this thing."</p> + +<p>"And here's a hole in mine, too," Charley declared +in accents so surprised that no one would +have dreamed that he had made both slits the night +before to serve as an excuse for the rejection of the +dangerous hose. "We can't use either one of them, +we'll have to get out the new hose."</p> + +<p>Manuel's face for a second was a picture of +bewilderment and baffled rage, but in a moment he +was again suave and smiling. "I don't see what +can have made those cuts," he declared. "They +can be patched in a few minutes, however. It would +be a pity to throw away such hose, it is as good as +new except for those two little places which can be +speedily fixed."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_122" id="Page_122">[122]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVI.<br /> + +<small>TOO LATE.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">No</span> patched hose for me," Charley said, decidedly. +"If the divers want to risk using it, they +can."</p> + +<p>It was not just the reply the wily Greek had expected +and he hastened to answer.</p> + +<p>"You are right, it does not pay to take risks. +I will get the new hose and put it on."</p> + +<p>But Charley was ahead of him. He did not intend +to give the wily Greek any chance to play tricks +with the new hose. He brought it out from the +lockers in which it was kept and, after examining it +carefully connected it to the air pumps and helmets. +Before putting on his head-piece, he tried the air +pump also. It proved to be in perfect working order +and sent the air gushing through the hose. Manuel +fastened the life-line below his arms, but Charley +called the captain to adjust the heavy helmet over +his head.</p> + +<p>As soon as his feet touched the bottom, Charley +moved forward for the wreck, Walter at his side.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_123" id="Page_123">[123]</a></span> +Neither lad wished to remain below a second longer +than was necessary for they fully realized that they +were running a terrible risk in descending at all. +They found the box they had discovered the day +before entirely empty, the divers had brought another +out from the wreck's hold and broken it open. +The gold was in twenty dollar pieces and in a few +minutes the lads had transferred several hundred +dollars from the box to the baskets. It was hard to +resist taking more but the risks were too great to +permit it. Quickly hastening back to the patch of +sponges, they tore up several baskets full of the mud +and covered fungus and, making a slit in each with +their sheaf knives, stuffed in the coins. It was the +very plan the divers had followed but Charley had +decided that they would not be looking for the +adopting of their own trick. As soon as the last +coin was hidden and the loaded sponges placed in the +basket with others on top of them to complete the +load, Charley signed to Walter to ascend and stood +watching him until he had been drawn to the surface, +then he gave the signal to be drawn up himself. +He was raised a few feet up from the bottom then +he sank quickly back to the place from which he +had risen and he saw the end of the life-line dangling +in the water twenty feet above his head. <i>It +had been pulled loose from his body.</i></p> + +<p>Charley stood for a moment looking at it in +terrified dismay while his quick brain took in the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_124" id="Page_124">[124]</a></span> +awful significance of his position. Frightened as he +was, he could not but admire the quickness with +which Manuel had hit upon another scheme for his +undoing after that of the greased hose, had failed, +for he had not a doubt that the Greek had fastened +the life-line to him in such a manner that it would +pull loose with a hard jerk. He was in no immediate +danger of death for the air hose still connected +him with the surface and the fresh air still +came gushing in a welcome stream into his helmet, +but a moment's reflection convinced him that this +was not all of Manuel's scheme, for the Greek would +know that the captain and Walter would soon become +uneasy over his delay and would start an +investigation which would quickly reveal that the +life-line was no longer attached to him. Clearly, +the Greek had another card up his sleeve which he +would soon play and Charley waited for it with +every nerve strained to keenest tension. He felt +longingly of the air hose, wondering if the frail tube +would hold for him to pull himself up to the surface +by it, but he quickly decided that it would not +stand the heavy strain and to break it would mean +his instant death. Keeping one eye on the life-line +so tantalizingly out of his reach he moved slowly +forward until he stood beneath the diving boat which +showed like a dim shadow above him. Suddenly a +thrill of horror went through him, the diving boat +was slowly drifting away—Manuel had played his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_125" id="Page_125">[125]</a></span> +trump card. In a flash the terror-stricken lad comprehended +the situation. Some one of the Greeks, +under Manuel's instructions, had stealthily severed +the cable, relying on the boat's slow drift being +unnoticed by the captain and Walter until it had +dragged apart the frail air hose. But, just as +Charley had given up all hope and waited for the +parting of the hose which would mean his death, the +dangling life-line was jerked up out of sight,—his +companions had discovered a part at least of his +plight—upon their next actions depended his life or +death.</p> + +<p>The next few seconds seemed like hours to the +helpless lad, then a dark speck appeared in the +water above him quickly growing in size until he +could see that it was Chris fighting his way downward +with long steady strokes and following the air +hose in his descent. The little negro was nearly exhausted +when he reached the bottom. Thrusting the +end of the line he had brought into Charley's hand, +he turned upward and shot to the surface like a +rocket. Charley whipped the line about his waist +and gave the signal to pull up. He was swiftly +pulled to the surface, hauled aboard the boat, and +his helmet removed. Chris, breathing heavily, was +standing by the mast, the water dripping from him. +Walter and the captain, pale with fear, stood close +beside him.</p> + +<p>"Thank God, you're safe, lad," cried the old<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_126" id="Page_126">[126]</a></span> +sailor, tears in his eyes. "We feared the air hose +would part before Chris could get to you. We had +just pulled on the life-line and found it had come +loose from you when we discovered the boat had +gone adrift. I reckon, she must have chafed her +cable in two against a sharp piece of coral. Queer +how everything happens all at once that way, sometimes."</p> + +<p>It was clear the simple old sailor did not suspect +that the trouble was anything but an accident, and +Charley hastened to reply,</p> + +<p>"All is well that ends well, but I've nearly had the +life scart out of me. I don't think I'll ever want to +go down again."</p> + +<p>He was watching Manuel closely as he spoke and +he noted with satisfaction the expression of relief +on the Greek's swarthy face. If he could only keep +him from thinking that he knew anything about the +gold and had not discovered his treachery, he hoped +to be able to avoid open violence until they were +prepared and ready for it. He was convinced that +the Greek was too cowardly to risk the danger of +being shot in open mutiny so long as he thought +himself unsuspected and free to scheme their removal +without danger to himself.</p> + +<p>The diving boat was worked back to her old +position, another anchor dropped, and donning their +suits the divers resumed operations below. When +they came to the surface at the end of their two hour<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_127" id="Page_127">[127]</a></span> +trick below they seemed strangely excited and conversed +eagerly with Manuel and the rest of the crew. +Charley was for awhile puzzled to account for their +excitement, but 'ere long the solution came to him. +Like all plans intended to deceive, his had contained +a fatal defect.</p> + +<p>"Walt," he whispered to his chum, "those chaps +have noticed that some of the gold has been removed +from that box. We are in for trouble, now, I fear." +The Captain and Chris were warned to be on their +guard but it seemed that the warning was unnecessary, +the excited talk amongst the crew soon ceased +and the fresh divers quietly prepared for their +descent.</p> + +<p>But in spite of the quietness, there was a tension +and earnestness in the crew's manner which made +the anxious little party of chums feel that they were +standing at the edge of a powder mine which might +explode at any minute.</p> + +<p>"I would rather have open fighting than this +awful waiting," Walter whispered.</p> + +<p>"We will have that soon enough," said his chum, +grimly. "It will come as soon as we try to make +them get the schooner under way."</p> + +<p>The long anxious day at last drew to its close, +anchor was got up on the diving boat, and she was +headed back for the schooner.</p> + +<p>As they passed a large piece of driftwood covered +with large black birds with very long necks, Manuel<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_128" id="Page_128">[128]</a></span> +pointed at them, "Those are fine eating," he said +wistfully. "If the young gentlemen could kill a few +it would give us all a great feast."</p> + +<p>Walter looked at Charley who nodded assent, for +he was not loath that the Greek should witness their +skill with the revolver.</p> + +<p>Both boys had practiced often with their revolvers +and were better than average marksmen. Their +pistols were automatics, a style of weapon with +which even the unskillful can shoot fairly accurately. +Walter fired six shots in as many seconds, killing +four birds and wounding one. Charley fired four +shots at the same time, killing two birds and crippling +a third. The rest of the birds took flight before +the boys could shoot more. The captain and +Chris emptied their pistols at the flying flock without +success.</p> + +<p>The diving boat was run alongside the dead birds +and they were picked up by the crew. Manuel +seemed delighted, "The young gentlemen are +wonderful shots," he declared.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_129" id="Page_129">[129]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVII.<br /> + +<small>OUTWITTED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> chums hastened below when the schooner +was reached for they were eager to talk over the +next move to be made.</p> + +<p>"Things have got to be brought to a head right +off," declared the captain when Charley had +acquainted him with his suspicions of Manuel's foul +play. "It's rank foolishness to linger along an' give +them more chances to work out their devilish tricks. +It's better to have trouble with them right now while +we are prepared than to wait and perhaps have +them take us unawares."</p> + +<p>"Thank goodness the time for action is close at +hand," Charley agreed, "I could not stand this +anxiety and suspense much longer. Let's go over +our plan once more and make sure that we each +know our parts so that there will be no hitch when +we come to carry them out. Now as soon as we +have supper Chris and I will get into the dingy and +pretend that we are going to row around for fun. +We will pull back and forth until it gets good and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_130" id="Page_130">[130]</a></span> +dark, then we'll gradually work out to that buoy. +We will cut it adrift, take it aboard, pull due East +from the schooner for a mile and anchor it again. +That will throw them way off the scent if they +should manage to get back here again before us, +while it will tell us just where to look for the wreck. +That part is easy, the trouble will come when we +get back to the boat. First thing we had better do +is to stretch several ropes across the deck from rail +to rail just forward of the mainmast. That will +delay and bother them if they should try to rush +us in a body. The next move will be to get Manuel +aft and get the irons on him. We had better get +him down here in the cabin to attempt that. As +soon as we get him helpless, we will carry him up +and make him give our orders to get up anchor and +get sail on the schooner. He's too great a coward +to encourage his shipmates to make a rush for us +so long as he is in our power. They may try it in +spite of him, however, when they realize that the +gold is going to be lost to them. If they do we will +have to fight them off while Chris tends to the wheel. +We don't want any bloodshed if we can help it but +we mustn't let them get aft of the mainmast, they +would make short work of us if it ever came to close +quarters. Do you all understand now what we have +to do?"</p> + +<p>His companions nodded.</p> + +<p>"Then we had better reload our pistols, fill up our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_131" id="Page_131">[131]</a></span> +cartridge belts, and get ready," he continued. "I'll +get the ammunition."</p> + +<p>But in a moment he was back from his cabin, his +face pale and grave.</p> + +<p>"How many shells have you got left in your +pistol?" he demanded.</p> + +<p>"One," Walter replied, while Chris and the captain +broke open their weapons to show only empty +chambers.</p> + +<p>"I have got three shots left, that makes four altogether," +Charley said, hopelessly. "All the rest +of our ammunition has been stolen out of my bunk."</p> + +<p>His companions grew as grave and pale as himself +at the announcement. With only four shots left +they were practically helpless in the hands of the +Greeks.</p> + +<p>"There is just one chance left," Charley declared, +desperately. "We have got to get Manuel in +our power and try to control the crew through +him. It may work and it may not, but it's our only +hope. Chris, go tell him we want to see him here +in the cabin."</p> + +<p>As soon as the little negro had gone, Charley +brought out a pair of handcuffs from his grip and +placed them in his pocket. "When I give the signal, +get them on him," he said. "I'll lock the door so +that he cannot get out or the crew come to help him. +He'll likely put up a fight and we'll have to watch +out for his knife, but the three of us had ought to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_132" id="Page_132">[132]</a></span> +be able to handle him. But hush, here they come +now."</p> + +<p>Footsteps sounded on the companionway stairs, +the cabin door opened, and Chris appeared, closely +followed by the Greek. The little negro stepped inside +but Manuel paused on the threshold and swept a +keen glance over the assembled party. Perhaps +some instinct warned him of his danger, perhaps he +decided that the time had come for his last treacherous +move. With a quick leap, he sprang back +through the open doorway, slammed the door to, +and bolted it outside, and the little band of chums +were prisoners in the cabin of their own ship.</p> + +<p>Charley leaped from his chair, but he was too +late.</p> + +<p>"Outwitted," he cried as he sank back into his +seat. "Beaten at every point of the game. What +fools, what bunglers we are." There was as much +chagrin as fear in his exclamations. To be so badly +beaten after all his vigilance and careful planning +was hard to bear.</p> + +<p>His companions sat silent with despair. So suddenly +had it all happened they had not yet had time +to realize that they were completely in the hands of +the Greeks who could do with them as they pleased.</p> + +<p>Charley flipped open his pistol and handed one of +his remaining cartridges to his chum, "That gives +us two apiece," he observed, "although I doubt if +we will either of us need them." He retired to his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_133" id="Page_133">[133]</a></span> +cabin and reappeared with a blanket and a book. +He spread out the blanket on the floor and stretching +himself out on it prepared to read. "Might +as well get what enjoyment we can," he said. +"There's nothing we can do, so we might as well +take it easy while we may."</p> + +<p>"How can you be so careless?" his chum exclaimed, +"any minute they may come down upon +us."</p> + +<p>"Little danger of that," the other replied, coolly. +"They know we've got four shots left yet. What +would be the use of their taking chances when they +have got everything in their own hands."</p> + +<p>But his companions could not view their position +with the same hopeless resignation. While he read +on apparently unconcerned, they discussed plan after +plan for escape from their prison and perilous situation, +only to reject one after the other as wildly +impracticable. At last they abandoned the discussion +in despair.</p> + +<p>"Better turn in and try to get a good night's +rest," Charley advised them calmly. "I will keep +watch for the first four hours, although I don't believe +there's the slightest use of it."</p> + +<p>"I'm too hungry to sleep," Walter declared. "I +wonder why they do not send us down our supper."</p> + +<p>"Bless your simple little soul," his chum exclaimed, +"They do not intend us to have anything to +eat. I thought you understood that."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_134" id="Page_134">[134]</a></span></p> + +<p>His companions looked at each other in dismay. +This, the greatest of all their perils, had not before +occurred to them. They understood now the awfulness +of their position. All the food and water were +stored forward. The Greeks had only to let them +alone and they would slowly die of hunger and +thirst.</p> + +<p>"They will not get us that way," declared Walter, +desperately. "Before I'll die of hunger and thirst +I'll set the schooner on fire."</p> + +<p>Charley nodded approval. "I've been thinking +of that myself," he said. "A quick death is better +than a slow torturing one. But there is plenty of +time to talk of that. While there is life there is hope +and I have a feeling that something is going to turn +up to help us out of this scrape. I've just happened +to think of one thing that's in our favor."</p> + +<p>He was prevented from explaining the new hope +which had occurred to him by a knock on the cabin +door and Manuel's sneering voice enquiring,</p> + +<p>"Are the gentlemen quite comfortable?"</p> + +<p>"Quite," Charley assured him, calmly. "Much +more comfortable than you and your mates will be +when the law reckons with you."</p> + +<p>"There is no law at sea but the law of the strongest +and most cunning," the Greek said, smoothly. +"But I bear a proposal from my shipmates for +your distinguished consideration."</p> + +<p>"State it," replied the lad, briefly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_135" id="Page_135">[135]</a></span></p> + +<p>"You are all in a bad position," stated the Greek +with oily maliciousness. "You were cunning but +not cunning enough or our positions would now be +reversed. We have only to do nothing now and you +will all die. It would sadden our hearts to lose such +loving friends but we would strive to bear up +bravely under the blow. But why should you all die +when we are willing to spare one. All that one +would have to do would be to take an oath to be +faithful and true to us and do as we bid him. Not +only would his life be spared, but he would receive +a share of the great wealth we have discovered."</p> + +<p>"Why are you so very generous in your offers?" +Walter demanded, sarcastically.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_136" id="Page_136">[136]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XVIII.<br /> + +<small>IMPRISONED.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">We</span> need one of you," explained Manuel, with +startling frankness. "Perhaps we could get along +without but it does not pay to take chances. There +is a government cutter which patrols the banks to +see that the sponging vessels are complying with the +laws. She may come upon us accidentally any time +and it would be awkward explaining why we continued +to work without American officers. It would +very likely get us into trouble. But if one of you +takes the part of the captain and shows the papers +and explains that the rest have died from fever, all +will go smoothly."</p> + +<p>"I suppose you have decided which one of us you +want?" Charley asked, curiously.</p> + +<p>"Any one of you will do, but we prefer you. +You have brains enough to realize where your own +interests lie. It is easier to handle a smart man than +a fool. Consider the chance we are giving you, on +the one hand slow, painful, certain death; on the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_137" id="Page_137">[137]</a></span> +other, an honored position, great wealth and +safety—we are generous indeed."</p> + +<p>"But how do you know that I will play fair?"</p> + +<p>"The moment you joined us you would be as +liable to the law as the rest of us," Manuel said +calmly, "We would live or hang together. You +would not dare to trifle with us, and I should watch +you closely all the time."</p> + +<p>"Here is my answer," declared Charley, whose +indignation had been steadily rising at the cold-blooded +proposal. "If you would all keep your +part of the agreement,—which I am convinced you +would not do, I'd die rather than join such a pack of +dirty murderers."</p> + +<p>"You are a bigger fool than I thought," replied +the Greek calmly. "I will leave you to consider +the matter better. Hunger is a great persuader, and +I am in hopes that you will soon see where your +best interests lie. Good-night, gentlemen, good-night, +may your dreams be of the pleasantest."</p> + +<p>"He's evidently somewhat worried," said +Charley, hopefully, when the Greek's mocking voice +had ceased. "He believes, I guess, that there is a +good chance of the cutter coming upon him or he +would not make such a proposal, although he would +not keep his part of it any longer than the danger +lasted. Our only hope is to keep up our strength and +spirits as long as possible. There is a chance that +the cutter may come along before it is too late. Better<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_138" id="Page_138">[138]</a></span> +all turn in and get some rest while you are still +not too hungry to sleep. I will call one of you to +take my place as soon as my four hours are up, although +I do not believe that they will trouble us."</p> + +<p>The lad was right in his belief. The night passed +away without any alarm and they were able by turns +to get some little sleep. With the coming of daylight, +they crowded to the windows and searched the +dreary waste of waters for sign of smoke or sail, +but found none. The crew were going about their +work in cheerful unconcern. Leaving a half dozen +men on the schooner, the balance got aboard the +diving boat and sailed out to the sponge ground +where they could be seen working steadily all day +bringing up the gold from the bottom. The prisoners +suffered much during the long day from their +increasing hunger and thirst.</p> + +<p>At night the diving boat returned to the schooner +and the dispirited watchers could see that the crew +had not wasted their day by any means. Both +sponge baskets were nearly full of the gold coins.</p> + +<p>"We've got to do something, I don't care how +desperate it is," declared Captain Westfield. "Anything +is better than this keeping still and suffering. +By to-morrow this time we'll be too weak to do +much and thar ain't no certainty that the cutter will +come along this way at all. I'm in for doing something, +no matter what."</p> + +<p>Charley turned from his gazing out of the window,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_139" id="Page_139">[139]</a></span> +"Look here, Captain," he called, softly. +"Speak low," he cautioned as the old sailor crept +to his side, "we don't want them to hear us on +deck."</p> + +<p>"Geewhilikens!" whispered the old seaman in +swift comprehension, "they've left the diving boat +fastened right under our windows."</p> + +<p>"God grant that they may not think to move it," +the lad replied, trembling with excitement. "We +can do nothing until it gets dark and they retire to +the forecastle."</p> + +<p>Walter and Chris were quickly made acquainted +with the suddenly-offered chance of escape and their +joy knew no bounds.</p> + +<p>Then followed hours which seemed like days to +the breathless, anxious watchers. The Greeks ate +their supper and lounged around the deck talking +and laughing. It seemed as though they would +never retire to their bunks. But at last their voices +gradually ceased and silence settled down upon the +schooner. Charley cautiously opened one of the +big windows and swung it outward, then climbing +softly toward the opening, lowered himself to the +diving boat's deck. The Captain, Walter, and Chris +followed. Not a word was spoken for each realized +the terrible risk they were running. As soon as all +were crouched motionless aboard, Charley, with his +knife, severed the rope which bound them to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_140" id="Page_140">[140]</a></span> +schooner and the boat drifted slowly away from the +ship's side.</p> + +<p>No one moved until the schooner was at last lost +in the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Start up the engine," said Charley, as he took +the helm, and Walter slipped down amongst the +machinery. After a few minutes' fumbling in the +darkness, he crept back.</p> + +<p>"There's no gasoline in the tank," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Everything seems against us," Charley sighed. +"Well, get sail on her. We will have to do the +best we can."</p> + +<p>In a few minutes the great square sail was spread, +and, leaning over, the little craft sent a line of foam +rippling from her bow.</p> + +<p>"They'll have hard work finding us in this darkness," +exulted the captain as he took the helm from +Charley. "I reckon, we'd better shape a course for +the nearest port,—that's Judson. As soon as we get +thar, we can telegraph to all the ports along the +coast to watch out for the schooner. We've got +'em now, I reckon, lads, they'll have to put in somewhere +sooner or later, an' they'll be nabbed. I feel +just like yelling for joy."</p> + +<p>The rising spirits of the little party were helped +by Chris' discovery of a couple of loaves of stale +black bread, and part of a bottle of ripe olives in +one of the lockers. They made a meagre but very +welcome repast upon the uninviting food.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_141" id="Page_141">[141]</a></span></p> + +<p>But their joy over their lucky escape was soon +dampened by the threatening appearance of the +Western sky. A heavy bank of clouds was slowly +rising there from which came flashes of lightning +and the rumble of distant thunder.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, it ain't nothin' but a thunder squall," +the captain assured them. "Thar ain't no call to be +uneasy, this is a mighty seaworthy little craft. I +reckon, we could ride out a right smart gale in her +if we had it to do."</p> + +<p>Before they ran much further the captain gave +the order to lower and reef the great sail. When +hoisted again, it was only a tiny patch of canvas, as +compared with its former size.</p> + +<p>"Thar's only one thing for us to do when that +squall strikes us an' that's to scud before it," the old +captain declared. "We can't heave her to under +that sail. Luckily, the way it's coming won't blow +us out of our course much."</p> + +<p>They had not long to wait for the storm to burst. +The wind soon descended with a violence that +threatened to bury the diving boat in the seas it +brought with it. But the little craft had been built +to stand just such weather, and, quickly gathering +headway, she darted away before the gale. With +the wind came the rain in great driving, blinding +sheets. The boys hailed its appearance with joy. +They spread out their jackets, bits of sail, and even +their hats to catch the precious drops. In a short<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_142" id="Page_142">[142]</a></span> +while they had secured enough to quench their intense +thirst. This done, they gathered around the +captain at the helm ready to render any assistance +in their power. There was little they could do for +the old sailor would trust no one but himself to +steer in the heavy sea-way. As the hours passed by +without showing any abatement of the storm, it became +evident to his companions that he was growing +anxious.</p> + +<p>"I don't like the way it's hanging on," he declared. +"We must be making at least twelve miles +an hour and, at that rate, we will have the land close +aboard before daylight. Crawl forward, Charley, +an' keep a sharp look-out, the sky is clearing some +an', I reckon, you can see a few hundred feet +ahead."</p> + +<p>The lad obediently worked his way up into the +bow, and bracing himself against the anchor bitts, +peered ahead into the darkness. He could make out +nothing at first but the heavy foam-flecked, tossing +water. He sat watching intently till, at last, Walter +crawled forward to take his place. He had only +got part way back to the stern when there came a +cry from his chum,</p> + +<p>"Hard down! hard down!"</p> + +<p>With true seaman's quickness, the Captain +jammed the long tiller over and the little craft, escaping +broaching in the trough of the seas by a +miracle, shot up into the wind—a second too late.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_143" id="Page_143">[143]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Hang on for your lives!" the old sailor cried.</p> + +<p>Black masses loomed out of the darkness to leeward. +A great wave picked up the helpless boat and +flung it with crashing, breaking timbers, upon the +rocks.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_144" id="Page_144">[144]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XIX.<br /> + +<small>WRECKED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys had obeyed the old sailor's order, and, +though greatly shaken by the shock, they retained +their hold on the boat.</p> + +<p>"Quick, get on the rocks," shouted the Captain. +"She'll pound to pieces in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>Fortunately, the boat's bow had been driven up +on the ledge nearly out of the water. The boys +dropped over the side followed by the old sailor, +and, though beaten and bruised against the sharp +rocks succeeded in struggling out upon the one +which reared itself above the water. They glanced +back to where the boat had struck, but, short as had +been their struggle out, it had witnessed the destruction +of the staunch craft. Only that portion of her +bow lodged upon the reef remained intact, the balance +of her hull was a mass of twisted, splintered, +broken planks.</p> + +<p>Great as was the danger from which they had +escaped, their present position was still far from +safe. The slippery rock afforded but insecure footing +and it was frequently swept by the larger seas.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_145" id="Page_145">[145]</a></span> +At such times, they had all they could do to keep +from being swept off its slimy surface.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, we've struck on a reef," the Captain +said, anxiously. "It all depends upon the tide +whether we are safe or not. If it's low tide, now, +high tide will cover this rock so deep that we'll not +be able to hang on to it."</p> + +<p>It soon became evident that the tide was still rising, +though slowly. The waves began sweeping +over the flat rock with such violence that the tired, +wretched, anxious, little party could hardly maintain +their footing. To the right and left of them, +rose other higher masses of rock, but they did not +dare to attempt to reach them through the darkness +and the boiling surf. Wet, cold, hungry, and +wretched; they clung to their insecure refuge until +day began to break in the East. With the coming +of light they strained their brine-smarting eyes to +discover what manner of place it was upon which +they had been thrown. The outlook was not reassuring. +They were, as the Captain had surmised, +on a point of low-lying reef, most of which was constantly +wave-swept by the monstrous surges. To +the East of them, lay a low, marshy shore dotted +here and there with small islands covered with +cedar hammocks, but between them and the islands +was at least two miles of foaming water. The boys +gazed wistfully at the longed-for land.</p> + +<p>"We can't make it," Charley said, sadly. "Chris<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_146" id="Page_146">[146]</a></span> +might, perhaps, be able to swim it, but it would be +a long swim for the rest of us at any time, and, tired +and weak as we are now, it would be impossible. +We will have to stick it out here until the storm goes +down a bit, then, try to fashion some kind of a raft +out of the planks of the diving boat."</p> + +<p>"We can't be far from Judson," said the Captain, +with an attempt at cheerfulness. "A boat may +come by an' pick us up any minute."</p> + +<p>But the boys were not cheered by any such prospect. +They knew that the chance of any boat being +out in such weather was very small indeed. One +fact, however, gave them a little hope; the tide was +undoubtedly falling. It had evidently been almost +at its height when they had landed on the rock.</p> + +<p>"I wish we had something to eat," Walter sighed, +"we have had nothing but a little bread in two +days. I begin to feel weak all over."</p> + +<p>Chris gazed thoughtfully at the water on the +shore-side of the rock. "I reckon, I might find +somethin' down dar," he observed. "I'se goin' to +try it anyway. You white chilluns has sho' got to +hab somethin' to eat."</p> + +<p>Although the water was somewhat smoother to +the lee of the rocks, it boiled and foamed there +threateningly and the boys endeavored to dissuade +the plucky little negro from the attempt, but their +objections only made him the more determined.</p> + +<p>"Golly! you chilluns doan know what a diver dis<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_147" id="Page_147">[147]</a></span> +nigger is," he said, proudly. "You jes' stay still an' +watch him now." He removed his clothes, handing +them to Charley to hold, slipped over the side of the +rock, and sank down beneath the surface. He was +gone so long that the watchers had begun to grow +anxious when he reappeared, blowing like a porpoise. +In one hand, he held tightly clenched, a big +stone crab and a large conch.</p> + +<p>"Take 'em," he exclaimed, "I'se goin' down +again. Dar's heaps more of dem on de bottom."</p> + +<p>He continued diving until he had brought up six +more conchs and two more crabs, then he crawled +out on the rock completely exhausted, and held up +one foot for their inspection. There was a tiny +puncture in the sole of it from which the blood was +slowly trickling.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'se goin' to hab some trubble wid dat +foot," he observed, gravely. "Ole Mister Stingaree +gib me a dig dar. He warn't much bigger dan +a plate, but der horns are powerful poison."</p> + +<p>His announcement sent a chill of fear to the +hearts of his companions, for they all well-knew the +dangerous character of the flat, horn-tailed fish +which lurks on the bottom in Florida waters. The +Captain did not lose a second in whipping out his +sheath knife and cutting open the puncture which he +washed out thoroughly with sea water. He then +made Chris sit on the edge of the rock and hang his +foot over in the water.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_148" id="Page_148">[148]</a></span></p> + +<p>The plucky little negro bore the operation with +unflinching cheerfulness. "I sho' wish you'd open +up one ob dem conch for me, Massa Charley," he observed. +"If dis ting's goin' to make me sick, I +wants to be dat much ahead."</p> + +<p>Charley quickly broke open one of the conchs +and gave him the meat,—a big lump of tough flesh, +almost sufficient for an entire meal. He also opened +several others for the Captain, Walter, and himself, +upon which they made a hearty and strengthening, +if somewhat tasteless, meal. Chris ate but little of +the tough meat, he soon pushed it away from him +with a weary little sigh.</p> + +<p>"I doan want no moah," he said, quietly. "I'ze +gettin' berry sick. Reckon ole Mister Stingaree +dun got dis nigger for sho'."</p> + +<p>His little ebony face soon took on a dull-ashen +hue and he began to vomit violently; passing from +these spells into a heavy stupor, the mysterious subtle +poison from the stingaree was getting in its +work. His grieving companions watched him in +helpless suspense, there was nothing they could do +to relieve his sufferings.</p> + +<p>"We can't let him die like this," Charley cried, as +the little sufferer twitched in spasms of pain. "I +am going to try to reach shore and find help. He +has taken bigger risks for us many a time."</p> + +<p>Neither Walter or the Captain tried to stop him. +They would have gladly offered to make the attempt<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_149" id="Page_149">[149]</a></span> +in his place but he was the strongest and best swimmer +of the three.</p> + +<p>He removed his jacket and shoes and with a last +good-bye, plunged off of the rock and headed for the +distant shore. He had not gone more than twenty +yards when he stopped with a cry of joy.</p> + +<p>"Come on," he called back, "the water isn't more +than three feet deep here. There's only a deep place +near the rocks and you can get across that easily."</p> + +<p>But he had to return to help them get Chris across +the deep narrow channel, for the little negro's struggles +in his spasms threatened to drown his helpers. +At last, the dangerous stretch of water was safely +crossed, and, leaving Walter and the Captain to half +float and half carry Chris between them, the lad +waded ahead, picking out the shoalest and smoothest +path to the shore. They arrived there spent and +panting and sank down for a moment to recover +their breath. It was not an inviting-looking place +where they had landed. A low rock-strewn marsh, +covered with tall, rank grass stretched away before +them for two or three miles before it met the higher, +heavily-wooded mainland. Here and there the +marsh was dotted with small, island-like clumps of +dark green cedar trees, and, picking up the light, +little negro in his strong, young arms, Charley +headed for the nearest of these, followed by his exhausted +companions. The passage was made with +difficulty; low needle-pointed rocks strewed the way,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_150" id="Page_150">[150]</a></span> +and here and there lay pools of soft, boggy mud, +tenanted by repulsive, swollen looking moccasins. +It needed care to avoid the one without stepping on +the other, but, at last, the patch of high ground was +reached and, laying his burden beneath a wide-spreading +cedar, Charley turned to his companions.</p> + +<p>"We have got to work quick if we are to stand a +chance even of saving him," he said, crisply. "Walter, +get in to the mainland as quick as you can and +bring me all the palmetto berries you can find,—hurry. +Captain, let me take your flint and steel and +then get me a lot of soft mud from the marsh."</p> + +<p>Tired though they were, the two hastened away to +execute his orders, while Charley worked swiftly to +carry out the plan he had formed while coming +ashore. It was a heroic one, but rough measures +were the only ones it was in his power to apply. +Hastily gathering together a pile of dead cedar +limbs, he lit a fire with the flint and steel. While it +was blazing up, he stripped off his belt and, tying it +above Chris' knee, with a stick twisted it tight until +it was embedded in the flesh, shutting off the flow of +blood from below to the heart. He next heated a +small stone in the now blazing fire and applied it +while hot to the swollen wound. The smell of the +crisping flesh sickened him, but he doggedly stuck to +his task until he judged the wound was sufficiently +cauterized. Chris lay mercifully lost to the pain in +a deep stupor. The lad had just finished burning<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_151" id="Page_151">[151]</a></span> +the wound when the Captain returned with his +jacket full of soft mud, and, emptying it out, +hastened back for another load. Charley heaped a +lot of rocks upon the fire, and, as soon as they were +hot, ranged them close on each side of the wounded +limb, heaping the soft mud on top of them until he +had formed an air-tight mound over the leg. He +now had a great poultice of hot mud of great drawing +power, the danger was that Chris might be attacked +by other spasms and succeed in working his +leg out from the hot covering. To prevent this, the +lad tore his shirt up into strips and, binding the little +negro tightly, piled stones around the encased leg +so that it could not be easily moved.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_152" id="Page_152">[152]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XX.<br /> + +<small>HUNTING HELP.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Charley</span> next cut off small branches of cedar +and placed them under the unconscious little fellow's +head and back so that he might rest as comfortably +as possible. This done, he sat back breathless and +exhausted and waited impatiently for Walter's return.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield surveyed the young physician's +work with hopeful admiration. "If Chris lives, it +will be you as has saved his life," he declared.</p> + +<p>"He has saved mine more than once," Charley +replied, "but I am afraid he is not going to live. I +don't like this deep stupor he has fallen into. I +wish Walter would hurry."</p> + +<p>Walter had been hurrying as fast as he could, and +he soon appeared bearing a hatful of ripe palmetto +berries. His riddled shoes and bleeding feet told of +reckless running over the sharp rocks.</p> + +<p>Charley smashed the ripe berries between two +stones, catching the juice in his cap. Chris' teeth +were tightly set, but he managed to pry them apart +with his knife blade and forced some of the sticky +liquid down his throat.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_153" id="Page_153">[153]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I don't know whether it will help him or not, +but I am in hopes it will," he said, as, tired out, he +sat down by the little fellow's side. "Those berries +make a powerful tonic and stimulant, and I believe +that is what is needed. The poison seems to have +deadened the heart's action and brought on that +stupor. A few minutes will tell whether it is going +to do any good."</p> + +<p>It soon became evident that the rude remedies +were performing their mission well, the sufferer's +pulse, which had grown slow and feeble, quickened, +and his little face began to lose some of its +ashen hue.</p> + +<p>As soon as he became sure that a change for the +better was taking place, Charley arose from his +brief rest.</p> + +<p>"I am going to find help," he declared. "We +must get him to some place where he can have +proper attention. How far do you think we are +from Judson, Captain?"</p> + +<p>"Not more than twenty miles to the north of it, +I judge. Maybe not more than ten miles. But you +must not dream of starting yet awhile, lad. You +must rest for a bit, an' have something to eat first."</p> + +<p>"And I am going with you when you start," +Walter declared. "Something might happen to you +amongst those slippery rocks and awful bog holes. +The Captain can do all that can be done for Chris +while you are gone."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_154" id="Page_154">[154]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was no disputing the wisdom of both suggestions +and they busied themselves with the first +proposition, the finding of something to eat. This +demanded more time and trouble. Another trip had +to be made down to the water and considerable +searching was necessary before they could collect +enough of crabs and shell fish to make the full meal +that their hunger craved. Their rest they gained +while their dinner was roasting in the coals.</p> + +<p>Their rest, meal, and Chris' steadily improving +condition, put them all in better strength and spirits, +and the boys were cheerful when they bid the old +sailor good-bye and made their start in search of +help.</p> + +<p>"We'll be back as soon as we can get back, Captain," +Charley said, "but you don't want to worry +if we take longer than you expect."</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'll keep too busy to have much time +for worryin'," the old sailor replied. "Jes' be careful, +lads, an' get back as soon as you can."</p> + +<p>He watched until the rank marsh grass hid the +two lads from sight, then busied himself with making +the camp a little more comfortable for himself +and his sick companion. Chris' welfare was the +first thing to claim his attention. With his sheath +knife he cut armful after armful of marsh grass and +added it to the rough couch Charley had fashioned +for the little negro, converting it into a soft, comfortable +bed. The low-hanging cedar boughs<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_155" id="Page_155">[155]</a></span> +formed a kind of rude shelter over the little lad, but +the captain was not entirely satisfied with it. The +rainy season was near at hand and heavy showers +might be expected at any time. A thick layer of +marsh grass placed over the lowest cedar limbs +quickly made the covering more to his satisfaction. +This done, he paused for a brief rest and to decide +what should be his next task. Although, he knew +that the port of Judson could not be more than +twenty miles away, he realized that, owing to the +necessarily slow traveling amongst the sharp rocks +and bog holes, it might be at least three days before +the boys could succeed in getting back with help. +His duties, then, would be the care of Chris, the providing +of food for them both, and the gathering of +firewood. Water was luckily plentiful, there was an +abundance of it in a cup-like depression near the +center of the island.</p> + +<p>In a Northern country with no weapons but his +sheath knife, these tasks would have seemed almost +impossible of accomplishment, but the captain was +not discouraged. The first thing, of course, was to +see that the little negro's marked improvement was +not checked. Heating more stones in the fire, the +old sailor piled them around the mound of mud covering +the wounded leg. Then, as the berries Walter +had brought were nearly exhausted, he decided that +the next thing of importance was to lay in a fresh +supply. He found the trip to the mainland slow and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_156" id="Page_156">[156]</a></span> +dangerous. Where the way was not strewn with +sharp-pointed rocks, it was dotted with forbidding-looking +sink holes of soft, slimy mud. Rank-growing +marsh grass covered the whole, making it extremely +difficult to pick out a safe passage through +the dangers. At last, however, he gained the mainland +where he found the oily black berries growing +in greatest profusion. He gathered his jacket full +of them and then sat down on a fallen log to rest a +minute and look around. It was an inviting spot in +which he found himself. The land rose up from the +marsh to form a high, sloping bluff through which +trickled a stream of clear, reddish water.</p> + +<p>The bluff was covered with a dense growth of +palms, satinwoods, bays, rubber trees, and low-ground +palmettos. It was an ideal place for a +camp, and the captain eyed it regretfully, wishing +that it was possible to bring Chris there from the +little marsh-surrounded island. But that was impossible +until the little fellow was able to walk and +he dismissed the idea with a sigh. He was just +gathering up his jacket of berries to leave when a +noise in the undergrowth close at hand made him +sink back to his seat on the log. The brushes before +him parted suddenly and a large deer stepped +out into an open place not twenty feet from where +he sat. For a full two minutes, he and the timid +animal remained motionless, looking directly into +each other's eyes, then the old sailor pulled out his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_157" id="Page_157">[157]</a></span> +sheath knife and sprang for it with some wild notion +of securing it for food, but the deer leaped lightly +away a few steps and stopped again as if in deepest +wonder and curiosity. The captain sheathed his +knife with a sigh. "I reckon, you don't know how +wicked men are," he addressed the graceful animal. +"Guess you ain't ever seed many men or you +wouldn't be so powerful tame. Some steaks from +you would taste right good, but you ain't aiming to +let me get close enough for that. Well, good-bye, +old fellow, I hope I'll meet you again sometime +when I've got a good gun."</p> + +<p>Saying which, the old sailor picked up his burden +and headed back for the island, the deer gazing after +him in innocent-eyed wonder.</p> + +<p>He had nearly reached the little camp when a +scream from Chris sent him forward at a run, regardless +of rocks and sink holes.</p> + +<p>The scene that met his gaze as he burst into the +little clearing chilled him with horror and dismay.</p> + +<p>Attracted, no doubt, by its warmth, two huge, +swollen-looking moccasins had crawled up on the +little heap of mud and now lay with their flat, ugly +heads within a few inches of the little negro's trembling +body.</p> + +<p>"Don't move an inch, Chris," he shouted, as he +broke off a dead limb from a cedar tree.</p> + +<p>The caution was useless, for, bound as he was, +hand and foot, Chris could only lay and stare in +horror and helplessness.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_158" id="Page_158">[158]</a></span></p> + +<p>A couple of well-aimed blows from the stick +killed the two poisonous, sluggish serpents, and, +dragging them to the edge of the island, the captain +pitched them out into the marsh.</p> + +<p>"They ain't very pleasant visitors," he remarked +as he returned to his helpless companion, "but I +reckon, they've done you a heap of good. You was +laying like a dead man when I went ashore and now +you look right pert and lively."</p> + +<p>"Dey's too sudden an' powerful medicine," +grumbled Chris. "Dis nigger might jes' as well +die as be scart to death. Golly! how my leg does +burn and smart. Please take dat stuff off ob hit, +Massa Captain, an' unloose my han's."</p> + +<p>But the old sailor feared to remove the mud poultice, +dreading another relapse. However, he untied +the little negro's hands, upon his promise that he +would lie still and not move. He was delighted +with the change in the little lad. Whether the shock +from the snakes, or, what was much more probable, +the continued effects of the palmetto juice had done +the work, the stupor which had frightened them all +was entirely gone, and the patient soon declared +himself decidedly hungry.</p> + +<p>Cutting a stick and laying it within Chris' reach +so that he would have the means of protecting himself +from other possible visitors, the Captain departed +in search of food.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_159" id="Page_159">[159]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXI.<br /> + +<small>THE CASTAWAYS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was lucky for the captain that he was wise to +the resources of the Florida coast. A stranger to +the country would not have known where to look +for food and would likely have soon perished of +hunger. Although he had no other weapon than +his sheath knife, he went about his task with the +air of a man who was confident of success. Before +leaving the island, he cut a long, straight cypress +pole and sharpened one end to a keen point. With +this in his hand, he made his way down to the Gulf. +The tide was high again but there was a mass of +rock some two hundred feet from shore which protruded +a couple of feet above the water. Removing +his shoes, he waded cautiously out, prodding +the bottom before him with his pole and picking +his way carefully to avoid stepping on a stingaree.</p> + +<p>The rock reached, he perched himself on its edge +and sat peeping down into the water which was +clear as crystal. He had not long to wait. In a few +minutes a fish swam slowly past close to the rock, +and, taking careful aim, the old sailor dove his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_160" id="Page_160">[160]</a></span> +rude spear down with all his force. Its point struck +just behind the fish's head, passing entirely through +its body. It died without a struggle, and the captain +lifted it out upon the rock with a shout of triumph. +It was a beautifully-specked sea trout about +three feet in length and weighed at least twelve +pounds. Although there was plenty of other fish +within sight, the trout was enough for their present +needs and, scaling and washing it carefully, the captain +waded ashore with his prize. But he was not +yet quite satisfied. Laying his fish down upon a +bunch of clean sea moss, he examined carefully the +muddy beach near the water's edge. Here and +there, tiny jets of water squirted up from the mud, +and, where they seemed to be most numerous, he +began to dig. In a few minutes he had unearthed a +couple of dozen large clams. With these and the +fish, and a huge armful of moist sea moss in his +arms, he made his way back to camp where Chris +was eagerly awaiting his return.</p> + +<p>"I sho' wish I could get up from hyah," mourned +the little negro. "Golly! I reckon, I'd show you +how to cook dat fish so dat you nebber could eat +nuff ob hit."</p> + +<p>"You jes' lie still thar," commanded the captain. +"I'm a Cape Cod man, an' thar ain't any +cook living that can show a Cape Cod man how to +cook this kind of grub. You just watch and learn +somethin'."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_161" id="Page_161">[161]</a></span></p> + +<p>Chris watched him with professional jealousy +and interest. He firmly believed that no one on +earth could cook as good as he but he reluctantly +admitted to himself that the old sailor made his +preparations with considerable promise of success.</p> + +<p>First, he scooped out a hole in the ground about +three feet deep and two feet square and kindled a +small fire in the bottom upon which he placed a +layer of small rocks, as soon as it was going good, +then, he paused to remark regretfully,</p> + +<p>"I wish we had some potatoes. I never heard of +a clam bake yet without potatoes."</p> + +<p>"Dar's something jes' as good as 'taters," declared +Chris, pointing to a low-growing plant. +"Jes' you dig up some ob dem roots an' try 'em. +Hit's wild cassava, an' hit taste jes' like Irish +'taters."</p> + +<p>The captain dug down with his sheath knife and +unearthed several tubers a couple of feet in length +and about three inches in circumference. He regarded +them dubiously, but, on Chris' repeated +assurances that they were good and wholesome, he +cut off several pieces and washed them carefully. +By the time this was done, the fire in the pit had +burned low, and the stones were smoking hot. Cutting +several broad, green, palmetto leaves, he laid +them on the stones and spread over them a thin +layer of the moist sea moss. Upon the moss he laid +the fish and over it spread another layer of moss<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_162" id="Page_162">[162]</a></span> +upon which he placed the clams, covering them with +more moss, upon which he placed the cassava, and, +piling a thick layer of sea grass over the whole, +built a small fire on top of it. Then he sat down +and watched the fire while he and Chris waited +hungrily the slow cooking of their meal. At last, +the captain declared that it must be done. The fire +on top was raked away, the contents of the pit were +taken out and placed upon green, clean palmetto +leaves, and the two castaways fell-to with appetites +sharpened by their long wait. And what a feast it +was,—the clams cooked to perfection in their own +juice, the fish juicy and delicious, the cassava snow-white +and mealy and all rendered doubly delicious +by the salt spicy taste of the seaweed in which they +had been cooked. And what a joy it was to feel +that the worst of their troubles were over. Chris +getting better, the boys soon to be back with help, +all the worry and anxiety they had suffered past, +the next few days to see them all safely back in +Tarpon, where they would all wait in comfort and +safety, ready to claim their ship when the Greeks +brought her in, and, after that, they would return +for the gold and with it they would secure the +many things they had longed for all their lives.</p> + +<p>Surely the prospect was bright enough to make +the two lonely castaways chatter brightly, cheerfully, +and hopefully over their evening meal. They +could not see the dangers, worries, and misfortunes<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_163" id="Page_163">[163]</a></span> +yet to befall them, and it was well they could not for +it would have robbed the two of the happiest hour +they had had in many days.</p> + +<p>At last, the feast was over and Chris had paid +the cook the highest compliment of which he could +conceive.</p> + +<p>"Golly! Massa Capt., you cooked dem tings +might nigh as good as I could have done."</p> + +<p>Although there were many things which the +captain wished to do, darkness was fast coming +on and he had to complete his final preparations for +the night. First, he cut a lot of small boughs which +he piled up under the shelter close to Chris to serve +as his own bed. This done, he gathered piles of +wood which he spread in a circle around the big +cedar and set on fire to protect them both from +chance visits of snakes during the night. By the +time this was finished, it was dark and he crept in +under the shelter close to his dusky little companion +in misfortune, and, after a short, simple prayer +full of thankfulness for their deliverance from the +dangers that had threatened them, he quickly fell +into the deep sleep of total exhaustion. But sleep +did not come so readily to Chris. He had slept, or +been unconscious, much of the time since his accident +and the stimulating effect of the palmetto +medicine helped to drive slumber away from him. +He lay very quiet to avoid disturbing the old sailor's +rest, but, try as he would, he could not get to<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_164" id="Page_164">[164]</a></span> +sleep. At last he gave up the attempt and lay with +eyes wide open looking out at the stars and the +twinkling camp-fires. From the marsh about came +strange noises of the night, the croaking of multitudes +of frogs, the cackle of marsh hens, the squawking +of cranes, and the rustling of the marsh grass +in the wind. Slowly the circle of fire died down, +smouldered and went out. Only the big main camp-fire +was left a glowing mass of embers.</p> + +<p>Suddenly the wakeful little negro's ears caught +another sound mingled with the voices of the +night,—a slow, heavy, creeping noise. For a time +he lay quiet listening, his hearing strained to the +utmost to catch the new strange sound. He waited +until there was no doubt that it was close at hand +and steadily drawing nearer, then, he reached +over and shook his snoring companion.</p> + +<p>"Wake up, Massa Captain," he cried, "dar's +some wild beast a creepin' into de camp."</p> + +<p>"I hear it," agreed the captain, instantly wide +awake. "Jes' lay still, lad, an' don't be frightened. +I'll stir up the fire a bit, that will run it off."</p> + +<p>He arose from his couch and strode boldly for +the smouldering fire.</p> + +<p>"Look out!" Chris yelled, suddenly, "Foah de +Lawd's sake, look out!" His keen eyes had caught +a glimpse of a black shape passing between the old +sailor and the mass of glowing embers, but his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_165" id="Page_165">[165]</a></span> +warning came too late,—the captain was upon the +moving shape before he saw it.</p> + +<p>A swishing noise rent the air, a loud thud, the +old sailor was knocked backward several feet flat +on the ground, and, with a loud, sharp bellowing, +the mysterious visitor glided away into the darkness.</p> + +<p>"Is you hurt? Is you hurt, Massa Cap?" cried +the terror-stricken lad.</p> + +<p>"A little bit, a little bit," called back the old +sailor, his voice hoarse with pain.</p> + +<p>He came creeping back into the shelter on hands +and knees.</p> + +<p>"It was a big bull alligator," he explained, painfully. +"Must have been twelve feet long. It +caught me a fearful blow on the legs with its tail. +I hope thar ain't no bones broken but it feels as +though thar was."</p> + +<p>A close examination proved his fears groundless, +but the terrible blow had done all but break the +bones. In spite of the pain, however, he crawled +forth again and replenished the fire, but he was +faint and giddy with pain before he succeeded in +getting back into the shelter and stretched out on +his couch once more.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I'll be all right by morning," he said, +hopefully, "but I don't calculate I'll be able to +sleep any more to-night, my legs hurt too bad for +that. Don't make any difference though, I 'low<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_166" id="Page_166">[166]</a></span> +I've had enough sleep for one night—it can't be +more than a couple of hours 'till daylight."</p> + +<p>It proved to be even less and with the coming of +light he removed his trousers and examined his +limbs anxiously. He had indeed received a terrible +blow from the prowling monster, both legs were +bruised and swollen where the tail had struck it and +it seemed a miracle that the bones had not been +broken. It caused him exquisite pain to rise upon +his feet, but there was work which had to be done, +and, in spite of his suffering, he must do it. So, +hiding his pain as well as he could, he prepared to +sally forth to secure food for the day.</p> + +<p>But in spite of all his efforts he could not entirely +hide his intense suffering.</p> + +<p>"You jes' lay down an' let me go out an' find +grub, Massa Cap," Chris pleaded. "I feels jes' as +well as can be again now."</p> + +<p>But the sturdy old sailor would not listen to his +pleadings.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_167" id="Page_167">[167]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXII.<br /> + +<small>ANOTHER DANGER.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Dar's</span> one thing I want you to do 'fore you go +projectin' off," said the little negro. "I wants you +to cut me some ob dem palmetto buds. I'se goin' to +braid you a hat. Hit's a plum wonder dat you ain't +got sun struck goin' bareheaded like you is."</p> + +<p>"I ain't had time to remember that I lost my hat +when we were wrecked. I'se been so worried an' +busy," said the captain. "Now you speak of it, +my head does feel sort of dull an' heavy. I hope +the boys will think to cover their heads with something—this +sun does beat down right hot."</p> + +<p>"Mass Charley will sho' rig up some kind ob +hat," Chris declared, confidently. "'Sides dey's +both young an' can stand a heap more sun den +what you kin. You jes' be mighty careful dis +mornin' an' by noon dis nigger will hab a fine hat +fixed for you. I'se done made lots ob dem on Cat +Island."</p> + +<p>There was a few young cabbage palms scattered +over the island and the captain cut out several of<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_168" id="Page_168">[168]</a></span> +the buds with his sheath knife and placed them beside +the little negro, then, knotting up the ends of +his bandanna handkerchief to form a turban, he +took his spear and started for the shore.</p> + +<p>Chris watched his slow, faltering, painful steps +until he was out of sight then began on his proposed +task. The buds were really young fresh +leaves yet unfolded, soft and pliable, yet very +strong. He shredded them into strips about half +an inch in width until he had accumulated quite a +pile; then, taking four of the pieces at a time, with +deft, skillful fingers, he wove them into a braid +about an inch in width.</p> + +<p>In a couple of hours, he had a string of braid +several yards long.</p> + +<p>The fashioning of the braid into a hat, without +needle and thread and while lying flat on his back +was a more difficult task, but he attacked it with +cheerful energy, using the point of his knife for a +needle and small strips of palmetto for thread. At +last, his task was completed, and, although the hat +was grotesque in shape and appearance, it was soft, +strong, and light, and would prove an effective protection +from the fierce rays of the tropic sun. The +little worker was not yet satisfied but at once set +about the manufacture of a basket from the same +material realizing how useful it would be for the +carrying of clams, fish, and other things.</p> + +<p>He was still engaged upon it when the captain<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_169" id="Page_169">[169]</a></span> +came stumbling into camp bearing a large fish and +several dozen more of the clams. The old sailor's +face was red, his movement weak and uncertain, +and his breathing heavy and labored, while he was +trembling violently from head to foot. He sank +down in the cedar's shade and wiped his flaming +face.</p> + +<p>"I reckon, I've got a touch of the sun," he said, +feebly. "I feel weak and dizzy. I'll lie down in +the shade for a bit an' it will pass off. Don't be +worried, lad, it will pass off in a jiffy."</p> + +<p>But pass off it did not. By the end of half an +hour the sturdy old seaman was lying unconscious, +his breath coming in short, wheezy gasps.</p> + +<p>Chris watched him for a while in anxiety and +fear. He knew that it might be dangerous for him +to move his wounded leg but all thought of his own +danger was lost in the fear that the stricken old +sailor was dying before his eyes. He attempted to +pull his leg out from the mound but could not move +it. The heat of the stones had baked the mud hard. +With great effort he raised himself into a sitting position, +and, with his sheath knife cut and dug away +frantically at the baked mud until he had the leg +uncovered, then, severing the bandage above his +knee, he attempted to rise but could not move the +injured limb. He fell back and viewed it with +frightened dismay. It was not a pretty sight for it +was a mass of blisters where the hot mud had clung,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_170" id="Page_170">[170]</a></span> +and a large bluish swelling marked the place where +the stingaree's horn had entered. The tight +bandage, shutting off the blood supply for so long, +had rendered it paralyzed and useless. Although +the breaking blisters caused him exquisite pain, he +fell to rubbing the numbed limb briskly with both +hands until the blood crept slowly back into the +veins. At last, he was able to gain his feet and by +resting most of his weight on his uninjured leg +managed to limp over to the unconscious sailor. +Luckily, he had been raised in a torrid country +where sunstrokes were of frequent occurrence. He +knew just what to do and he did it quickly and +surely. His first act was to raise the unconscious +man's head and place a high pillow of twigs +beneath it. Then, stirring the smouldering fire, he +placed several large stones in the glowing coals. +While they were heating he removed the captain's +shoes and bathed his hot head and flushed face with +cool water, and tearing his shirt to pieces, wet it and +bound it around the sufferer's head. By the time +this was done, the stones were hot, and, rolling a +couple up in his jacket, he placed them at the captain's +feet, then, seated by his side, he awaited the +result with fear and trembling. A terrible dread +gripped his heart that the remedies had been applied +too late, for the old sailor had all the appearance of +a dying man. Thirty minutes dragged slowly away +without apparent change, then, slowly, the old sailor's<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_171" id="Page_171">[171]</a></span> +breathing grew less labored and his face began +to lose some of its fiery hue. Chris hailed these +favorable signs with joy as indicated that the crisis +had been safely passed, but his joy was somewhat +dampened when the hours passed by without the +stricken man showing signs of consciousness. He +seemed to pass from his stupor to a deep sleep from +which the little negro dreaded awakening him. It +was evident that the old seaman was in for a long +spell of weakness from the heat stroke he had suffered. +There was nothing more his little companion +could do to relieve his sufferings and he +remained seated by his side watching him anxiously +until the waning of the afternoon warned him that +it was time to partake of food and make preparations +for the night. He had eaten nothing since the +night before and he was conscious of a sense of +growing weakness. The fish the captain had caught +was already tainted from the heat and the little +negro felt too weak as yet to venture forth to +secure more, so he dug up a few of the cassava roots +which he roasted in the coals. These, together with +a handful of palmetto berries, constituted his supper. +As soon as it was finished he began his preparations +for the night. Slowly and painfully, he +gathered together broken limbs to keep the circles +of fire going until daylight came again. By the +time this was accomplished and the fires lit he was +weak and trembling from pain and exhaustion and<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_172" id="Page_172">[172]</a></span> +was glad to crawl onto his couch by the captain's +side. The old sailor roused into momentary wakefulness +at the noise of the snapping twigs.</p> + +<p>"How you is, Massa Capt.?" demanded the little +negro, eagerly.</p> + +<p>"Weak, mighty weak. Feel as though I couldn't +lift my hand to my head, but I will be all right by +morning, I reckon. I guess, we have got no cause +to worry now. The boys will be back to-night or +early in the morning at the latest. How do you feel, +lad?"</p> + +<p>"Fine," lied the little negro, cheerfully. "Jes' +you go back to sleep again. I'll keep de fires up all +right."</p> + +<p>With a sigh of satisfaction, the captain closed his +eyes and was soon sound asleep again, but there was +no such rest for his little companion. Twice Chris +hobbled out and renewed the fires. The third time +he had to crawl forth on hands and knees. His +wound was again swelling rapidly and he could no +longer bear his weight on the injured limb. He +tried vainly to sleep. The wounded leg throbbed +with intense pain which gradually crept over his +whole body, making him feel sick and faint all over. +He understood the reason for his sufferings. Some +of the poison still left in his wound had, with the +removal of the tight bandages from his leg, found +its way back into the blood and was coursing +through his little body poisoning as it went.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_173" id="Page_173">[173]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Golly!" he remarked, grimly, to himself, "if +dem white chillens doan get back wid help an' +medicine by mornin', I reckon dis nigger ain't agoin' +to see Cat Island and his old mammy no moah. +An' if Chris gits plum helpless what's goin' to become +ob Massa Captain wid no one to tend to him. +He tinks he'll be all right in de mornin' but hits +goin' to take a powerful long time for him to get +real peart again."</p> + +<p>The long night dragged slowly away. Occasionally +the little negro crept forth and replenished +the fires, the balance of the time he lay quiet listening +for cry or sound that would tell of the boys' +return, but nothing fell upon his strained hearing +but the croak of frogs, the bellowing of alligators +and the strange night noises of the marsh.</p> + +<p>At daylight the captain awoke and attempted to +rise, but, although he was greatly improved, he was +yet too weak to stand erect.</p> + +<p>"You jes' lie still," Chris counseled him, "dar +ain't no call for you to go projectin' around none. +I'se goin' out an' git somethin' for us to eat."</p> + +<p>Although it cost him intense pain, the little negro +managed to walk erect until he was out of the old +sailor's sight, then he dropped down on hands and +knees and crawled painfully down to the shore.</p> + +<p>The touch of the cool salt water helped the +throbbing pain in his leg and he succeeded in wading +out to the rocks where he was not long in spearing<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_174" id="Page_174">[174]</a></span> +a large, fat mackerel. With this, he returned +to the camp, for he did not dare in his growing +weakness to search for clams or other food. He +found the old sailor asleep again, and, cleaning the +fish he broiled it over the coals. As soon as it was +done he awakened the sleeper.</p> + +<p>"Hyah is youah breakfas' all nice an' hot," he +announced. "You want to eat a plenty ob hit. +I'se agoin' to lay down a spell. I didn't sleep berry +good last night."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_175" id="Page_175">[175]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIII.<br /> + +<small>THE RELAPSE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Captain Westfield</span> ate heartily of the delicious +fish. Much to his delight, he found that, except for +the extreme weakness following his heat prostration, +he felt unusually well. He wisely decided not +to invite a relapse by getting up at once, and, as +soon as he had finished eating, he lay back upon +his couch and quietly fell asleep again. It was +midday when he awoke feeling much better and +stronger. The first thing that met his gaze as he +gained a sitting position was Chris lying in the +same position in which he had first flung himself. +He called to him several times but the little negro +lay still and motionless. Thoroughly alarmed, he +crawled over and surveyed the unconscious lad. +The sight of the enormously swollen leg and a few +minutes' fingering of the dark little wrist told him +what was the matter. The slow pulse beats showed +that the subtile poison, released from its confinement +by the removal of the bandage, had found its way +to the plucky, loyal, little heart.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_176" id="Page_176">[176]</a></span></p> + +<p>The captain sat down by the little fellow's side +and dashed the stinging tears from his eyes.</p> + +<p>"He's killed himself for me," he moaned. "If +he had laid still just as he was he would have been +all right. But, God bless him, he risked his life for +a poor, old, worthless hulk like me. An' thar ain't +nothing I can do to save him now."</p> + +<p>Although he had but small faith that it would do +any good in such a desperate case, he hastily crushed +out a cupful of juice from the palmetto berries and +forced it down Chris' throat, then, resuming his seat +by his side, he watched to see if the powerful +stimulant would have any effect.</p> + +<p>As the hours dragged slowly away he rejoiced +to see that the lad's condition apparently grew no +worse. Encouraged, he crushed out more of the +juice and administered it at regular intervals. "I +believe he's got a good fighting chance to pull +through. If the boys would only get back with +some whiskey an' drugs, now, I reckon, we could +save him. I wonder what can be keepin' them so +long. They've had plenty of time to make Judson +and back."</p> + +<p>But the afternoon wore away without sign of the +rescuers, and a new fear crept into the old sailor's +worries. Something must have happened to the two +boys. Late in the afternoon, he left Chris long +enough to hurry down to the shore in quest of fish +or clams for supper. He found the rock from<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_177" id="Page_177">[177]</a></span> +which he had fished completely submerged and a +heavy surf thundering far up into the marsh. +Under such conditions it was impossible to secure +fish or clams, and he returned to camp hungry, disappointed, +and with further cause for worry. The +heavy surf indicated another storm in the Gulf +which might reach where they were. If it did, it +would render their position still more uncomfortable +and dangerous. A heavy blow would continue to +cut off their supply of fish and clams and would +likely flood the low-lying marsh shutting them in on +their little island. If Chris had been well enough +to walk, the captain would have at once moved camp +to the mainland, but that was impossible now. By +sunset his fears were in a fair way to be realized. +The wind was steadily increasing in force, and, +blowing out of a clear sky, gave promise of still +greater violence. Supperless and worried, the old +sailor watched the night fall with but one thing to +cheer his drooping spirits—Chris was evidently +slowly improving. Likely much of the poison had +been drawn out from his wound by the hot mud +and the balance remaining had been overcome in +its paralyzing effects by the powerful stimulant. +The lad's pulse was slowly growing stronger and +it was clear that the crisis had been safely passed.</p> + +<p>The old sailor was too worried about the absent +lads to compose himself to sleep. Already, the surf +was sending up small wavelets far into the marsh.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_178" id="Page_178">[178]</a></span> +If the boys were returning the way they went, their +journey would be fraught with perils.</p> + +<p>The sky was covered with fleecy clouds but they +disappeared with the rising of the moon and by its +bright light he could see far out on the water where +the huge waves broke foaming white on the outer +bar.</p> + +<p>Suddenly he gave a shout that made Chris stir +in his stupor; "The boys! The boys!" he cried +in delight.</p> + +<p>In the broad path of moonlight, a small schooner +appeared feeling her way through a passage in the +reef under close-reefed sails.</p> + +<p>"They must have someone aboard that knows the +reef," he mused as he watched the little ship cautiously +weaving her way in between the dangerous +rocks.</p> + +<p>She held steadily for the shore until she was +scarce two cable lengths from it, then, she shot up +into the wind, her anchor was dropped, and her +sails lowered.</p> + +<p>The captain was down on the shore, heedless of +the flying spray, when the anchor hit the bottom.</p> + +<p>"Walt! Charley!" he roared at the top of his +voice.</p> + +<p>There was no answer and he hailed again.</p> + +<p>"Ahoy! Shore!" came an answering hail from +the schooner. "Who air yo' and what do yo' +want?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_179" id="Page_179">[179]</a></span></p> + +<p>The captain was silent for a moment with disappointment. +It was not the boys after all, but any +help was welcome at such a time and he made haste +to reply.</p> + +<p>"We're two shipwrecks in bad shape an' need +help. Who are you?"</p> + +<p>"The Hattie Roberts, sponger, from Key West. +Stan' by, an' we'll send a boat."</p> + +<p>While the strangers were launching a boat, the +captain had time to observe that the schooner's +decks were piled full of small boats and that, small +as she was, she carried a crew of at least thirty +men.</p> + +<p>"An old style, pole an' hook sponger," he decided. +"I didn't reckon there was any of them +left. I 'lowed the Greeks had run 'em all out of +business."</p> + +<p>Manned by half a dozen men, the little boat +came tearing through the waves towards the shore. +Flung up by a huge roller, she grounded almost at +the captain's feet. The instant she touched bottom, +her crew sprang over the side and drew her up safely +beyond the reach of the next roller. Even by the +dimmed light of the moon, the old sailor could see +that the new-comers were dark-skinned men with +heavy coarse features. He recognized them without +the aid of the peculiar accent as Conchs,—a +kind of mixed race belonging to the Florida Keys.</p> + +<p>"Whar's yo's companion?" demanded one, who<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_180" id="Page_180">[180]</a></span> +from his air of authority was evidently the captain.</p> + +<p>"He's on a little island just a little ways from +here. I'll have to get one of your men to help me +down with him."</p> + +<p>"All right, Sam here will go with yo'. Step +lively, we have got to pull out from hyar quick. +There ain't as good anchorage as I 'lowed to find +behind the reef. We'll have to make foah a better +harbor."</p> + +<p>The captain, with the sailor detailed to help him, +was hurrying off on their mission when the Conch's +skippers curiosity caused him to stop him in spite of +the preciousness of time.</p> + +<p>"How did yo's git hyah in such a fix," he demanded.</p> + +<p>"Been sponging with a Greek crew. Crew +mutinied. We escaped in a diving boat. Got +wrecked in the night on the reef out thar," replied +Captain Westfield, briefly.</p> + +<p>"Sponging with the Greeks!" snarled the Conch +with an oath. "Then the Greeks can help yo' out +of yo'r fix, by all that's Holy, I won't. Hyah, Sam, +jump aboard with yo'."</p> + +<p>"You are not agoin' to desert us?" cried the +captain in bewildered consternation. "For the love +of humanity, man, what do you mean?"</p> + +<p>"I mean that I won't raise a finger to help any +mons who deals with the Greeks—blast 'em," cried +the Conch, fiercely. "They've ruined us an' our<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_181" id="Page_181">[181]</a></span> +people. We used to be a happy an' prosperous race +a'fore they came with their diving suits an' tramped +all over the bottom of the Gulf. Killing the little +baby sponges with their iron shoes, an' stripping the +bottom clean as a Conch's floor. We've been run +out of the business, an' they did it. We've lost our +homes, an' they caused it. Our families don't have +enough to eat an' wear any more, an' they are the +reason—curse 'em, curse 'em, curse 'em."</p> + +<p>"But you are leaving us to certain death, man!" +pleaded Captain Westfield, "The water is rising +over the marsh, already."</p> + +<p>"An' it will be flooded inside of ten hours," declared +the Conch with cruel satisfaction. "All +aboard mons an' shove off."</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield grasped the gunwale of the +boat and tried to hold it while he reasoned and +argued with the fanatical Conch, but the infuriated +man rapped his knuckles with an oar and gave him +a shove with the blade that sent him struggling +backwards. By the time the old sailor recovered his +balance, the boat had been shoved off and was out +of his reach. He shook his clenched fist at the +Conch's receding figure.</p> + +<p>"You'll pay for this," he shouted. "No good +will come to you after such a trick." But it is +doubtful if the Conch even heard his voice above +the roar of the wind.</p> + +<p>The captain stood watching grimly until the boat<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_182" id="Page_182">[182]</a></span> +reached the schooner's side, and her close-reefed +sails were hoisted, her anchor broke and she headed +to the South inside the line of reef. When she had +faded away into the night, he turned back for the +camp filled with disappointment and dismay.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXIV.<br /> + +<small>THE FLOOD.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">As</span> the old sailor made his way back to the +island, he was alarmed to see how rapidly the water +was rising over the marsh. He splashed knee-deep +in the water at every step and it was easy to see +that it still continued to rise with astonishing +rapidity.</p> + +<p>His first act on reaching the island was to move +the camp to the highest knoll of ground, already +the lowest lying portions of the island were submerged. +Chris had regained consciousness though +he was still too weak to move without assistance. +He watched the old sailor's preparations with +evident interest and looked at the rapidly rising +water with evident anxiety.</p> + +<p>"If dat water doan stop comin' up, we is sho' +goin' to hab a hard time gettin' anythin' to eat," +he observed. "Can't get ober dem rock no way when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_183" id="Page_183">[183]</a></span> +dey is covered wid water, sho' to break a leg in one +ob dem holes."</p> + +<p>"The Lord will watch out for us, lad," encouraged +the captain. "Look at all that He has brought +us through. He has never deserted us in our hour +of need."</p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon dat's so," agreed the little +darkey, thoughtfully. He remained quiet for a +few minutes then said quaintly, "'Spect's we +oughter ask him to look out foah Massa Charley +an' Massa Walt. I'ze getting plum anxious 'bout +dem two white chillins. Dey had oughter been back +long 'fore dis. Massa Charley's mighty clever, but +I 'spect dat it wouldn't do no harm to ax de Lawd +to help him out a bit if he's in trouble."</p> + +<p>"No one can do without the Lord's help, Chris," +the captain said, gravely, "an', I reckon, them lads +need it powerful bad. Something pretty serious +has happened, I 'low, to keep them from coming +back. We'll ask the Good Lord to watch out for +them an' protect them."</p> + +<p>The old sailor knelt by the little negro's side +and in simple seafaring language prayed that the +Heavenly Father would watch over and protect the +missing ones.</p> + +<p>The simple steadfast faith of the old seaman +and the trusting little negro filled them with a sense +of security and peace. They doubted not that their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_184" id="Page_184">[184]</a></span> +humble petition would be answered and that now a +Heavenly Eye was watching over them and their +absent companions and that a Divine Hand would +guide them through their trials and danger. They +stretched out on their leafy couches and went fast +to sleep, while the storm raged and howled around +them and the rising water crept slowly up on their +little island.</p> + +<p>It was broad daylight when they awoke and +looked about them. It was a wild and terrifying +scene that met their eyes. The marsh between them +and the sea was completely submerged and covered +with rolling white-caps. Far out on the reef they +could see the mighty rollers flinging their spray +forty feet in the air when they struck the sunken +rocks. Of the island, none remained except the +high sands and knoll upon which was their camp. +Between the island and the mainland was two miles +of swirling, foaming water.</p> + +<p>"Can't get to shore, no ways, now, Massa Captain," +Chris observed. "You had oughter gone +in las' night when you had a chance an' left dis +nigger behind."</p> + +<p>"The Lord will look out for us, lad," said the +old sailor cheerfully. "I don't calculate that the +water's going to rise high enough to cover this +knoll we are on an' as soon as the wind drops a +bit, the boys will be back for us with a boat. It's +just a matter of being patient for a little while.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_185" id="Page_185">[185]</a></span> +We may get a little bit hungry, but, I reckon, we +can stand that without grumbling."</p> + +<p>"Sho' we can," agreed Chris, bravely. "Tho' +hit do seem like I was gettin' powerful hungry already. +Ain't dar none of dem cassava roots dat +we can get at?"</p> + +<p>A close search revealed that most of the patch +of tubers was covered by the rising water. A few +plants however still showed on the little knoll and +these the captain dug at once. There was only a +scant half peck of the roots but that was better +than nothing.</p> + +<p>The old sailor kindled a little fire and roasted +all the roots in the coals.</p> + +<p>"We might as well have one good full meal," he +observed, "I never did take much stock in this idea +of going on short rations when grub is scarce. I +always 'lowed that one good feed would carry a +man further than a dozen pesky little ones that +only tantalize the stomach."</p> + +<p>But the roots shrank greatly in the cooking, by +the time the skins were removed, there was but little +left for the hungry castaways. They still felt empty +after their meal was finished.</p> + +<p>The day dragged wearily away with no sign of +abatement of the storm. The water continued to +rise slowly, but so slowly that the two anxious +watchers were not without hope that the little knoll +on which they were would escape the overflow.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_186" id="Page_186">[186]</a></span> +Their position was by no means uncomfortable. +There was no rain and the weather was so warm +that the wind did not cause them to suffer any from +cold. Aside from their growing hunger and their +anxiety about their missing companions, they were +quite comfortable. Chris, in fact, was in better +shape than at any time since they had been cast on +shore.</p> + +<p>"I don' reckon dis storm can las' berry much +longer," he observed, cheerfully, when the sun went +down in a perfectly clear sky. "Dar ain't no +clouds to back up de wind an' hit's bound to play +out 'fore long."</p> + +<p>"That's just where you're wrong, lad," said the +captain. "A gale from a clear sky is the worst of +all. I ain't ever seen many of them but what I have +seen were all hummers."</p> + +<p>The two sat looking out on the gloomy waste of +waters until the moon, now at its full, rose and lit +up the wild scene about them almost as brightly as +day. At last they tired of the wild, gloomy, disheartening +scene, and, after a short prayer together, +stretched out on their couches. Chris was almost +instantly asleep but the captain lay long awake, his +mind full of their helpless situation, and, of anxious +conjectures as to the fate of the two absent lads. +His own position and that of his little companion +was such as to awaken his deepest fears. So long +as the storm continued, their rescue by land or Gulf<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_187" id="Page_187">[187]</a></span> +was impossible. No boat could live amongst the +rocks and raging waters which now surrounded +them. His long experience told him that the storm +was likely to continue at least two days longer.—He +had seen similar gales blow for an entire week +without a let up. Even after the gale was over, +it would take some little time for the waves and +water to subside. At the best, they would suffer +greatly from hunger before their rescue would be +possible. But, to do the old sailor justice, his +thoughts were not so much of their own situation +as of the absent lads. He could only hope and +pray that they had not started to return by water +before the breaking of the storm.</p> + +<p>As he lay motionless musing, his ear caught a +low grating sound as of heavy objects drawn on +coarse sand. He quickly sat up on his couch and +looked around. In the bright moonlight he could +see large dark objects moving over the white sand.</p> + +<p>"'Gators, an' a regular drove of them," he exclaimed. +"Wake up, Chris! Wake up!"</p> + +<p>The little negro struggled up into a sitting position, +still half asleep.</p> + +<p>"What's de matter, Massa Cap?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"Look at them 'gators, thar's dozens of them. +We've got to have a fire mighty quick an' stick close +to it."</p> + +<p>Chris greeted the sight of the dark objects with +a cry of joy.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_188" id="Page_188">[188]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Oh, Golly! De Good Lord's dun answered our +prayers. Dem's turtles."</p> + +<p>The old sailor sprang to his feet and would have +dashed for the nearest object if the little negro had +not restrained him.</p> + +<p>"You sho' scare dem all away if you do dat way," +he cautioned. "Jus' wait till dey gets to layin' an' +you can walk right up on 'em."</p> + +<p>The huge creatures crept steadily on up the shelving +knoll. Their progress was slow and clumsy, +and their lower shells dragging over the sand had +made the grinding noise the captain had heard. +They crept up to within ten feet of where the two +watchers lay, then, they halted, and, with their hind +flippers began to dig deep holes in the soft sand.</p> + +<p>"Dey lays der eggs in dem holes an' covers dem +up wid sand," Chris explained in a whisper. "Dey +each lays mighty nigh two hundred eggs. De warm +sand hatches out de little turtles."</p> + +<p>The two castaways waited until the great sea +hens had begun to lay, then Chris arose and walked +directly for them without any attempt at concealment. +The turtles did not pay the slightest attention +to his approach.</p> + +<p>"We'll take dese two smallest ones," he announced. +"Dey will be de tenderest. Jus' grab de +shell wid me, Massa Cap, back by de hind flippers +an' we'll flop 'em over on his back. Keep youah +eyes an' mouth shut."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_189" id="Page_189">[189]</a></span></p> + +<p>But the old sailor was too excited to heed the +advice. He grabbed the turtle's shell and heaved, +then staggered back spitting and coughing with +mouth, eyes, and ears full of sand, which the +creature with it's flippers sent flying in a cloud about +it.</p> + +<p>Chris waited until he had relieved himself of the +stinging sand and this time the captain, following +his advice, kept mouth and eyes tightly closed. A +few seconds sufficed to turn the two turtles on their +backs where they lay helpless.</p> + +<p>There must have been at least thirty turtles in +the bunch but the castaways contented themselves +with only turning the two, any more would have +been useless slaughter. Those unmolested quickly +completed their laying, covered the eggs and retreated +to the water.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXV.<br /> + +<small>THE FLOATING HATCH.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> castaways lost no time in rejoicing over +their good fortune. The Captain hastily kindled a +fire while Chris, with his sheath knife, proceeded to +butcher the smallest of the two turtles. Much experience +had made the little negro expert at the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_190" id="Page_190">[190]</a></span> +work and in a few minutes he had severed the two +shells and cut off several thick steaks from one of +the hind flippers. Then, squatting before the fire, +each impaled a steak on the end of a pointed stick +and toasted it over the coals.</p> + +<p>How good the steaming juicy meat tasted to the +two hungry ones. Steak after steak was broiled +and eaten before their ravenous appetites were +satisfied and they could eat no more.</p> + +<p>"Midnight is a sorter unusual hour for a feed," +Captain Westfield observed, "but, I reckon, we will +sleep none the worse for it. I 'low, we ain't got to +lay awake none worryin' about food now. Thar's +meat enough to last us for two weeks at least."</p> + +<p>"An' maybe, Ole Mister Gale will blow hisself +out," said Chris, hopefully, as, yawning sleepily he +stretched himself again on his couch.</p> + +<p>It was broad day when the castaways awoke from +the heavy slumber which had followed their hearty +midnight supper. They found the gale still blowing +with undiminished violence and the sky still brightly +blue. One thing, however, gave them great satisfaction, +the water had ceased to encroach upon their +little knoll. It had evidently reached its height.</p> + +<p>After a hearty breakfast of turtle steaks, the +two proceeded at once to dress and cure the turtles, +for they well knew that under the sun's heat the +fresh meat would soon spoil.</p> + +<p>They had neither salt nor smoke house with<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_191" id="Page_191">[191]</a></span> +which to cure it, but they went at the task with sure +confidence in the result. The meat was first cut +away from the shells and skinned, care being taken +to remove every particle of the greenish-colored +fat. Then, cutting across the grain, the meat was +divided into thin strips and spread upon leaves to +dry in the hot sun. It only remained for them to +protect it from the dews of night and chance rains +and a few days would see it thoroughly cured and +capable of keeping sweet and good so long as it was +kept dry.</p> + +<p>With some hazy idea that they might be of some +future use, the captain cleaned and washed out the +two, great, trough-like, upper shells of the turtles.</p> + +<p>"Dat looks like a lump of wreckage out dar by +de reef, Massa Cap," Chris observed as he +straightened up from his task of spreading out the +meat. "Pears like de tide is settin' hit in dis +way."</p> + +<p>"It is a bit of wreckage or a clump of seaweed," +the captain agreed after a brief survey. "It's drifting +in all right, but it's going to miss the island by +a good hundred yards."</p> + +<p>The two suspended work while they watched the +drifting object slowly near their island.</p> + +<p>"It looks like a hatch with something like a stack +atop of it," he observed to the captain as the object +drew close.</p> + +<p>"Hit's a man or 'ooman atop ob hit," cried Chris,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_192" id="Page_192">[192]</a></span> +whose eyes were keener than the old sailor's. "He's +layin' plum still, jes' like he was dead."</p> + +<p>Closer approach of the object convinced the captain +that the little negro was correct. There was +beyond doubt a motionless body lying on the low +floating hatch. It was evident too that the hatch +with its burden would pass the island at a distance +of at least one hundred and fifty yards. To venture +out and attempt to tow it in was to assume a terrible +risk. The water between it and the island was raging +and tossing over dozens of dangerous hidden +rocks. Only the strongest swimmer would have the +slightest chance of success, and, even should he +succeed, it might be to find that he had risked his +life to rescue a corpse. But the ocean breeds in its +followers a brotherhood that leads them to deeds of +quiet heroism. They never know when they may +be in need of a rescuing hand and it is seldom that +one turns aside from the rendering of service, no +matter how dangerous it may be to himself.</p> + +<p>When the hatch with its burden was nearly +abreast of the island Chris began to strip off his +clothes, but the Captain stopped him.</p> + +<p>"You're still too weak to attempt it, lad," he declared. +"You couldn't make it thar an' back, I +reckon I can fight it out all right. I've mighty nigh +got back all my strength."</p> + +<p>Hastily stripping off the pants and shirt in which +he was clothed, the old sailor slipped off into the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_193" id="Page_193">[193]</a></span> +water and struck out for the wreckage with long +steady strokes, warily avoiding the foaming spots +which marked the positions of the larger rocks. +The swim was not difficult for so experienced a +swimmer. The struggle would come when he +attempted to return with his burden. In a few +minutes, he reached the wreckage and, resting his +hand upon the hatch gazed down at the burden it +bore. He saw a man, apparently about forty years +of age, attired in rough seaman's garb, his face +bronzed and seamed from long years of exposure +to wind and weather. The stranger was lying flat +on his back on the hatch, his legs dangling over the +end. A rope passed around his body and under the +wood work prevented the larger seas from washing +him off his frail support. He was unconscious and +the captain reached over and placed his ear close +to his chest. He could detect a faint beating of +the heart. It was slow and feeble but still it was +beating,—the man was alive.</p> + +<p>Once satisfied of this fact, the old sailor quickly +shifted to the end of the hatch, and, resting one +hand upon it, and striking out with the other hand +and both feet, strove to force it back to the island. +He had not accomplished half the distance with his +burden when he saw that he could not hope to succeed. +The tide was slowly but surely sweeping him +in past the island direct for the mainland. Still, +he battled desperately on, swimming with all his<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_194" id="Page_194">[194]</a></span> +strength. Suddenly the little raft seemed to move +forward with increased speed.</p> + +<p>"Take it easy, Massa Cap," sounded Chris' voice +close to his elbow. "We can make it togedder all +right." The plucky little negro had been quick to +see the danger and equally quick to come to the +rescue.</p> + +<p>Between the two, after half an hour of heartbreaking +battling with the current, they managed +to shove the raft ashore, where they sank exhausted +and panting upon the sand.</p> + +<p>As soon as they were able to move, they unlashed +the unconscious sailor from the hatch, and, carrying +him up, laid him upon the captain's couch. The +man seemed nearly dead, and for hours the +two, wet, exhausted castaways worked over him, +struggling to coax the spark of life into a flame. At +last they were rewarded by seeing a tinge of color +creep into the bronzed face. At length the sailor +sighed and opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Water," he gasped, faintly.</p> + +<p>"Golly! I should reckon he's had 'bout enough +water," Chris exclaimed.</p> + +<p>"Get some for him quick," Captain Westfield +commanded. "The salt brine he has swallowed +has parched his throat and stomach."</p> + +<p>The sailor took only one mouthful of the proffered +water, then spat it out with his face twitching.</p> + +<p>"Salt, salt," he murmured.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_195" id="Page_195">[195]</a></span></p> + +<p>A horrible fear seized the captain. He snatched +the shell from Chris' hand and took a swallow of +the water. His fear was confirmed, it was salt. +The Gulf had risen close enough to their little well +to percolate through the sand into it and render it +as salt as itself.</p> + +<p>The little negro divined the situation from the +captain's face. "Golly! dat's bad," he cried. +"Doin' widout water is a heap wurser den doin' +widout food."</p> + +<p>"Water, give me water," pleaded the rescued +man. "My throat's parched, parched."</p> + +<p>"You shall have some water as soon as we can +get it," Captain Westfield assured him. There was +something vaguely familiar to the old sailor in the +man's queerly accented speech. It was more puzzling +as he had no recollection of ever having seen +the man before.</p> + +<p>Considering his low condition the sailor recovered +his full senses and a measure of his strength with +astonishing rapidity. It was plain that he had not +been deprived of either food or water for any great +length of time. He was soon able to sit up and take +notice of his surroundings. A curious look stole +over his bronzed face as his gaze took in the two +castaways.</p> + +<p>"How did I get hyah?" he demanded.</p> + +<p>Captain Westfield related the story of the rescue +briefly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_196" id="Page_196">[196]</a></span></p> + +<p>The sailor's rough features worked with emotion. +"I remember part," he cried. "Our vessel struck +on Needle Rocks in the darkness an' went down like +a stone. I had just time to throw myself on the +hatch an' pass a rope around my waist. The crew," +he shuddered—"must have all been dashed to +pieces against the rocks. God knows how I escaped. +An' yo' risked yo'r lives to save mine, yo' an' that +boy. Mon, how could yo' forgive me enough to do +such a deed?"</p> + +<p>"Forgive you?" echoed the captain, puzzled. +"I had nothin' to forgive."</p> + +<p>"I am Rufus Sanders, the Key West sponger who +refused yo'r appeals for help an' left yo' to yo'r +fate," cried the man, excitedly.</p> + +<p>"I did not know that, but it would have made no +difference," said the captain, gently. "You were a +helpless, shipwrecked man." He checked the flood +of thanks on the sponger captain's lips. "You have +nothing to thank us for," he declared. "We have +only saved you from one fate to suffer a worse with +us. We are hopelessly imprisoned on this island, +an' we have no water. All we can do is endure, +pray an' hope."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_197" id="Page_197">[197]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVI.<br /> + +<small>WITH THE BOYS.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Considering</span> the misfortunes which had befallen +them, the two chums were in surprisingly good +spirits, as they picked their way through the marsh, +headed South. It was a relief to be free from the +dread and apprehension under which they had labored +for so many days.</p> + +<p>"I feel almost as though we were on a picnic, +instead of being shipwrecked sailors who have been +robbed of their ship, and have lost all except the +clothes on their backs," Charley declared.</p> + +<p>"Everything is going to turn out all right after +all," agreed Walter, hopefully. "Chris is going to +get over his wound all right. He and the captain +will have no trouble in getting plenty of food and +water. We had ought to reach Judson by dark, and +we'll get a boat or wagon and return for them at +once. We can easily get from Judson to Tarpon, +and there we can get the United States Commissioner +to take up our case, and the minute the +'Beauty' enters port she will be seized and held for<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_198" id="Page_198">[198]</a></span> +us. At the worst it will only mean the loss of our +diving boat and a little patient waiting. And think +of the store of gold which will be ours for a little +work."</p> + +<p>But his chum was not quite so optimistic. "I do +not think that we had better build too great hopes +on recovering either our ship or the gold," he observed. +"That Manuel is a clever rascal. I fear +he will rise to the occasion. He may think that we +are wrecked in the storm but I am convinced he +will take no chances. He will plan and scheme to +the last to secure the ship and money and save his +own neck from the halter. He may be caught at +last but he will not sail boldly into any port. He's +too wary for that."</p> + +<p>His words did not dampen Walter's high spirits. +"There is a revenue cutter at Tarpon," reminded +his chum. "As soon as we get to Judson, we will +telegraph to the Commissioner. He will not wait +for the 'Beauty' to touch a port if we can put our +case strong enough. He will start the cutter out in +search of her at once."</p> + +<p>"I hope you are right. If we are going to make +Judson before dark, however, we are going to have +to travel faster than we are going now. It's slow +going amongst this mud and rock. Let us make our +way inshore and see if it's any better traveling +there."</p> + +<p>But as they approached close to the mainland<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_199" id="Page_199">[199]</a></span> +they saw that there was no hopes of easier traveling +in that direction. The dense hammock jungle extended +down to the edge of the marsh. To make +one's way through it would be far slower than to +continue over the marsh. They, accordingly, retraced +their steps to the water's edge. It was +slightly easier traveling close to the water. The +waves had beat down the marsh grass along the +edge leaving a kind of beach of rock and mud. It +was hard and dangerous walking but safer than over +the marsh itself, where the rank growth hid the +treacherous bog holes.</p> + +<p>The boys often paused in their march to examine +the masses of stuff that had been cast up by the +waves. The squall of the night before had robbed +the bottom of great masses of seaweed and had +taken heavy toll of the life in the water. Every few +minutes the lads would pass great clumps of seaweed +tangled together in beautiful rainbows of +bright scarlets, yellows, crimsons and purples. Curiously +enough, the storm had dealt very harshly with +the finny tribe. Likely many of the fish had been +caught in shoal water and their lives beaten out +against the cruel rocks. They dotted the shore and +the chums frequently halted to admire one's curious +shape or coloring.</p> + +<p>"I wonder what kind this one is?" said Walter, +pointing to a long slim fish of a beautiful brilliant +green.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_200" id="Page_200">[200]</a></span></p> + +<p>"That is a parrot fish," his chum enlightened +him. "I think they are one of the most beautiful +fishes that swim. They are of all colors, some are +violet, some of golden, some scarlet, and in fact, +they are found of every shade and hue. They get +their names from their many brilliant colors, I +guess."</p> + +<p>"What a wonderful mysterious thing the sea is," +Walter commented. "I never realized before how +much of strange life it contains."</p> + +<p>"What we see along the beach this morning is +only a very small sample of its population," his +chum replied. "Sometimes, I think that all life +must have come first from the sea. There is hardly +an animal on land which has not a grotesque likeness +in some creature of the sea. Take that fish there +with the peculiarly shaped head and horns. Its +resemblance to a cow is so striking that it has been +named the cow fish. There is another little fish with +a head just like a horse. It is called the sea horse. +Then there is the toad fish, the frog fish, the snake +fish, and hundreds of others closely resembling the +animals after which they are named. But here," he +concluded, "is, in my opinion, the most wonderful +fish I have ever heard of. I have seen many of them +but one always has a puzzling fascination to me."</p> + +<p>He had stopped before a flat round-shaped fish +which lay stranded in the edge of the water. It was +still alive and struggling feebly to get back into<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_201" id="Page_201">[201]</a></span> +deeper water. It was of a light-tan color and was +covered with spots of darker hue. On its upper +surface was a soft, spongy-looking, circular spot +It was not a pretty looking object and Walter +viewed it with disgust.</p> + +<p>"I don't see anything fascinating about it," he +commented.</p> + +<p>"Just put your finger on that soft spongy place," +Charley directed, "that's where it's wonderful +secret is concealed. It is not poisonous," he added +as his chum hesitated.</p> + +<p>Walter bent down and pressed his finger against +the spongy mass. The next instant he leaped back +with a cry of alarm, shaking his arm madly. +"Jerusalem!" he exclaimed. "What is it?"</p> + +<p>"Got a shock did you?" laughed his chum. +"That's an electrical fish. Their mystery to me +lies in where they get the electricity with which they +are charged. Even a small one like that contains +enough to give a powerful shock."</p> + +<p>The morning had been advancing rapidly as they +walked and talked and the sun was shining down +hot on their bare heads. Charley, justifying Chris' +confidence in him, was quick to recognize the danger +from its torrid rays.</p> + +<p>He cast a look up at the sun. "It is nearly +noon," he declared. "We must get something to +cover our heads with and then find something to +eat. I am getting as hungry as a wolf."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_202" id="Page_202">[202]</a></span></p> + +<p>There was nothing along the rocky, muddy beach +that would do for hats and the two bent their steps +in towards the mainland. There, they broke off +small leafy branches and thrust the stems down +the backs of their shirts so that the leaves would +tower above, and shade their heads. These made +only a poor substitute for hats, but shed off the +fiercest rays of the sun.</p> + +<p>Close to where they broke off the boughs was a +small running stream and the boys drank thankfully +of its cold sweet water.</p> + +<p>"We have no time to waste in cooking and I fear +our bill-o-fare for dinner will be rather scanty," +Charley said. "Let's look around here and see if +we cannot find fruit of some kind."</p> + +<p>There were palmetto berries in plenty all along +the high bank but the lads had no desire to partake +of them except in a case of necessity. Seeing nothing +promising along the edge of the jungle, they +scrambled up the bank and made their way slowly +and cautiously into the hammock, keeping a wary +eye out for snakes. They found fruit of several +kinds in abundance, but most of it Charley rejected +as being poisonous, or not fit to eat. They gathered +two kinds which he declared were both palatable +and nourishing. One was a golden-red fruit about +the size of a pear. It contained a large nut to which +the meat clung closely. One bite into it and the +boys' hands and faces were smeared with sticky<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_203" id="Page_203">[203]</a></span> +juice. "I would recognize that smeary juice and +strong turpentine flavor, anywhere," laughed +Walter, "these are mangoes, the fruit, they say, +you have got to get into a bath-tub to eat if you +want to keep clean."</p> + +<p>The second fruit was about the size of a large +plum and snow white in color with a blotch of red +on the sides. Its meat was sweet, milky and +slightly puckering.</p> + +<p>"They are cocoa-plums," Charley explained. +"They are considered quite nutritious but I would +be afraid to eat a great many of them at a time on +account of their puckerishness. We can eat all we +want to of the mangoes however, they will not +hurt us."</p> + +<p>As soon as their repast was finished the boys +filled their pockets with mangoes and cocoa-plums +and hastened back to the shore.</p> + +<p>They plodded steadily along while the afternoon +wore away, but their progress over the rocks and +mud was slow and they realized that they would +not be able to reach Judson before darkness +rendered further traveling dangerous.</p> + +<p>They were passing a matted clump of seaweed +on the shore when Charley, stopping with a cry of +delight, fished out from its midst a round piece of +wood about four feet in length, from which trailed +a long, light line badly frayed in places by the rock.</p> + +<p>"Do you recognize this?" he shouted.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_204" id="Page_204">[204]</a></span></p> + +<p>"No," replied his chum in wonder at his excitement.</p> + +<p>"It's the buoy that marked the place where the +gold ship lay. The Greeks will have a job to locate +the gold now. That storm must have chafed the +rope in two against a ledge of coral. Hurrah, +hurrah."</p> + +<p>"I don't see but that is as bad news for us as for +the Greeks," Walter said, dubiously.</p> + +<p>"It is, in a way," his chum replied. "Of course +it will make it harder for us to find the exact spot +where the treasure lays, but the Greeks will be +delayed by it and that will give us a chance to get +there with the revenue cutter and catch them before +they get all the gold removed and get away."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_205" id="Page_205">[205]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVII.<br /> + +<small>THE JOURNEY.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> still lacked about an hour to sundown when +Charley called a halt. "We cannot possibly make +Judson before night, and it would be sheer foolishness +to try to travel over these rocks after it gets +dark," he declared. "We would be sure to get +some bad falls and very likely break an arm or leg. +The best thing we can do is to find a good place to +camp while it is still light and make ourselves as +snug as possible for the night."</p> + +<p>Walter, who was beginning to feel tired out from +the long day's tramp, was quick to agree with his +proposal and the two lads headed in for the mainland, +for neither felt any desire to spend the night +on the wet, muddy marsh.</p> + +<p>Good fortune seemed to guide their footsteps for +they struck the mainland just where a little stream +of clear water bubbled forth amongst a clump of +towering cedars.</p> + +<p>"The very place for our camp," Charley exclaimed. +"You see what you can fix up in the way<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_206" id="Page_206">[206]</a></span> +of a shelter, Walt, while I look around and see +what I can find for our supper."</p> + +<p>Walter was fast becoming an adept at the science +of woodcraft and he went about his task with certainty +and dispatch. First, he broke off armsful of +small boughs which he spread in two piles upon the +ground close to the trunks of two big cedar trees. +These were to serve as their couches and over them +he proceeded to erect a rough lean-to to protect them +from the wind and dew. There were plenty of dead +boughs all around, and, selecting two of the longest +and straightest, he leaned them against the trunk +of the two trees about six feet from the ground, +embedding their other ends firmly in the ground. +Across these, he laid other limbs a couple of feet +apart and upon them piled palmetto leaves and +boughs to form a roof. Before the open front of +the rude structure, he built a roaring fire of dead +cedar limbs. Close beside it he piled up a huge +heap of wood with which to keep the fire replenished +throughout the night. This completed his labors, +and stretching himself upon his springy, fragrant +couch before the crackling fire, he waited hungrily +for his chum's return. He was becoming alarmed +over his long absence when there came a crackling +of boughs and Charley strode into the circle of firelight, +bearing in one hand a snow-white heart, or +bud, of a cabbage palmetto and in the other, a chunk +of fresh meat several pounds in weight.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_207" id="Page_207">[207]</a></span></p> + +<p>"What have you got there?" he inquired, +eagerly.</p> + +<p>Charley grinned, "I'm too hungry to stop and tell +you now. Sharpen up a couple of sticks and we'll +broil some steaks, then, I'll give you three guesses +as to what it is, and bet that you don't guess right."</p> + +<p>Walter hastily cut two long green palmetto stems +and sharpened them to points at the ends. By the +time he had them ready, Charley had cut a couple of +generous-sized steaks from the hunk of meat. The +balance of it he wrapped up in a couple of green +palmetto leaves and buried in the coals. While the +steaks impaled upon the sticks were sizzling appetizingly +before the fire, he wrapped up the palmetto +heart in green leaves and buried it beside the roasting +meat.</p> + +<p>So hungry was Walter that he cut bits from his +steak before it was fairly done and devoured them +with eager appetite.</p> + +<p>"Like it?" inquired his chum with a twinkle in +his eye.</p> + +<p>"Fine, it only needs a little salt to make it +perfect," Walter declared. "I can't quite place it +though. It tastes like a cross between pork and +beefsteak. What is it anyway?"</p> + +<p>"Guess."</p> + +<p>"Pork?"</p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"Coon?"</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_208" id="Page_208">[208]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"Opossum?"</p> + +<p>"Nit."</p> + +<p>"I give it up then. What kind of animal is it?"</p> + +<p>"I found it on the bank of a little creek not far +from here," said Charley, dreamily. "It was sound +asleep and it did not look very pretty or innocent +even in its slumber, but beggars can't be choosers, +so I got me a good heavy club and crept up on it +softly. When it woke up I was near enough to give +it a good rap over the head. It gave me a couple +of good licks in the shins with its tail, however, before +I got it killed."</p> + +<p>Walter rose in his indignation, "Why didn't you +tell me at the start that it was alligator meat," he +demanded, "I would not have eaten a mouthful of +it."</p> + +<p>"And you'd gone hungry to bed," said his chum +with a chuckle. "You'd have let your prejudice +cheat you out of a good meal. It tastes all right, +don't it."</p> + +<p>"Yes," Walter admitted, ruefully, "and, now +that I've eaten some of it, I might as well keep right +on eating."</p> + +<p>"Wise lad," Charley approved. "Let me tell +you there are lots worse things than alligator steaks +when one is hungry."</p> + +<p>The steaks disposed of, the boys attacked the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_209" id="Page_209">[209]</a></span> +roasted meat and palmetto cabbage with such +vigorous appetites that there was but little left when +their hunger was at last appeased.</p> + +<p>"Pretty slim show for breakfast," said Charley, +ruefully, as he eyed the scanty remains. "Let's see +if we can't fix up some way to catch something during +the night."</p> + +<p>The plan which they finally decided upon to +accomplish this was very simple. With their sharp +knives, they whittled out several sets of figure-four +setters, and, dragging several small logs just outside +the circle of firelight, they placed a figure-four +setter under an end of each and baited the triggers +with bits of meat left from their supper. An +animal nosing around after the bait would be sure +to spring the setter and cause the log to descend +upon it.</p> + +<p>"We will surely get a coon or opossum before +morning," Charley declared. "Animals have lots +of curiosity and some of them are sure to be +attracted by the light of our camp-fire. The smell +of the cooked meat will attract them also."</p> + +<p>This last task completed, the boys stretched themselves +on their soft couches before the cheery fire +whose rays danced and flickered amongst the leafy +greenness of their shelter. It was a cozy, cheery +little camp and the two lads lay long awake, talking +hopefully with the cheery optimism that waits +upon a hearty supper and healthy vigorous youth.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_210" id="Page_210">[210]</a></span> +When at last they fell asleep, it was with confident +hope of a successful morrow.</p> + +<p>It seemed to Walter that he had barely fallen +asleep when he was struggling in that nightmare +state which lies halfway between slumber and +entire wakefulness. He struggled pantingly for +breath, but every breath he drew seemed to stifle +him. Oppressed with black horror, he fought his +way back to consciousness. But wakefulness +brought small relief. The air was heavy with a +stench that nauseated and sickened him.</p> + +<p>Charley, crouched beside the fire, was holding his +nose with one hand, his face expressing unutterable +disgust.</p> + +<p>"What in the world is the matter?" Walter demanded.</p> + +<p>"One of our traps worked," announced his chum, +grimly. "It's only a little skunk, but my, what a +big smell."</p> + +<p>"I should say so," Walter agreed. "We can't +stay here. We'll have to move camp."</p> + +<p>"I second the motion to adjourn," said his chum, +solemnly.</p> + +<p>No time was lost in debating the question and the +lads quickly took their departure from their cozy +camp. They made their way cautiously along the +edge of the hammock until the raucous odor was +left behind, then they halted and built another fire.</p> + +<p>"The measly little varmint," said Walter,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_211" id="Page_211">[211]</a></span> +wrathfully, as they crouched beside the blaze. +"He's gone and cheated us out of a good night's +sleep."</p> + +<p>"Oh, it isn't as bad as all that," said his chum, +cheerfully. "It's nearly morning now. See, there's +the morning star in the East. Besides," he added, +whimsically, "That poor little fellow isn't to blame. +He didn't ask us to set a trap for him. I bet he +regrets the accident as much as we do." Then +throwing back his head he sang in his clear tenor +voice, "Driven From Home."</p> + +<p>As the humor of the incident dawned upon +Walter, he burst into laughter in which he was +joined by his fun-loving chum.</p> + +<p>It was too near morning to consider selecting +another shelter so the two sat beside the fire until +day broke, then they made their way back to the +camp to examine their traps. All were sprung, but, +outside of the skunk, the only victims were an opossum +and a coon which they bore back to their new +fire. The opossum they broiled and ate for breakfast +while the coon they roasted to carry along with +them for dinner.</p> + +<p>Sunrise found them once more on the march +headed South.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_212" id="Page_212">[212]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXVIII.<br /> + +<small>JUDSON.<a name="FNanchor_A_1" id="FNanchor_A_1"></a><a href="#Footnote_A_1" class="fnanchor">[A]</a></small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">By</span> noon the two lads estimated that they must +have come at least twenty miles from where they +had left the captain and Chris, and, if the old sailor +had been right in his reckoning, they could not be +far from their objective point, the town of Judson. +They began now to keep a sharp watch ahead and +ere long were rewarded by the sight of a low black +line projecting out from the marsh ahead. A closer +approach resolved the low black line into a long, +shaky, decrepit wharf, its piling rotting from age +and neglect and its timbers and planking fast falling +into decay. On the mainland back of the marsh a +few rude cabins, each at least a half a mile distant +from its nearest neighbor, rose from the middles of +wide neglected fields. One lone, aged sloop rode at +anchor near the wharf. The little port and the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_213" id="Page_213">[213]</a></span> +hamlet itself seemed to wear an air of deadly decay, +sadness and gloom.</p> + +<p>"Not a very cheerful or prosperous-looking +place," Charley observed as they clambered up on +the wharf and made their way ashore over its shaky +timbers.</p> + +<p>"No," his chum agreed, "but I am thankful to +reach it, poor as it is. My feet are getting sore +from tramping over these rocks, I can tell you."</p> + +<p>At the shore end of the dock the two paused long +enough to take a more careful survey of the place.</p> + +<p>"I declare it looks as though it was deserted or +all the inhabitants dead," Walter said nervously, +"See how the roads are all grown up with weeds as +though they were never used. There is no sign of +anyone about either."</p> + +<p>"Just notice those cabins," his chum exclaimed, +"They look just like the pictures I have seen of +houses the first settlers used to build during the +Indian times. They are built of great logs and +have loopholes like the forts of those days. What +a queer place!"</p> + +<p>"Well, there's smoke coming from the chimney +of that nearest cabin, and there seems to be someone +working out in the field by it," said Walter with +a sigh of relief. "I was beginning to think it was +an abandoned village."</p> + +<p>The two bent their steps towards the cabin +indicated. It was set in a square clearing of about<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_214" id="Page_214">[214]</a></span> +twenty acres, that was surrounded by a strip of +pine woods which separated it from its nearest +neighbor. As they drew nearer, they could see a +man at work near the cabin. He was ploughing up +the ground with a rude plow hitched to a yoke of +oxen.</p> + +<p>As the boys stepped out of the road into the +clearing, they were greeted by savage barks, and a +pack of dogs lolling around the cabin woke into +sudden life and came tearing towards them.</p> + +<p>The man at the plough let go the handles and +sprang into the cabin. The next minute a rifle +barrel protruded from one of the loopholes, "Halt +right where you-all is," called a voice from behind +the rifle.</p> + +<p>"Call off your dogs," shouted Charley, as he and +Walter, snatching up a couple of sticks, endeavored +to keep the growling, snapping curs at bay.</p> + +<p>"Who are you-alls an' what do you want?" demanded +the holder of the rifle.</p> + +<p>"We were shipwrecked twenty-five miles up the +coast. We want supplies and help to bring in two +companions, one of whom is badly hurt," answered +Charley.</p> + +<p>"Come closer an' let me have a good look at you-all," +commanded the cabin's occupant, "Here yu +Bet, yu Tige, yu Jim, be still thar," he called to the +snarling pack which slunk growling away at his +harsh commands.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_215" id="Page_215">[215]</a></span></p> + +<p>The boys drew near the cabin in obedience to +his order. A brief survey of them seemed to convince +its owner that they were not what he feared. +The cabin door was flung open, and, rifle in hand, +he appeared in the doorway.</p> + +<p>"Come in you-alls an' have a cheer," he invited. +"I'll jis' unhitch them oxen an' then, while I'm +rustling up a bit of supper, you-alls can give me +your story."</p> + +<p>The tired, hungry boys accepted his invitation +with alacrity, and, while he was busy unharnessing +the yoke of steers, they seated themselves in a couple +of rude home-made chairs, and gazed curiously +about them.</p> + +<p>The cabin was about twenty feet square. Its +rough log walls were whitewashed, and its pine-slab +floor spotlessly clean. At one end was a big old-fashioned +fireplace from the rafters above which +hung home-cured hams, slabs of bacon, and strings +of sausages. A barrel in a corner was heaped high +with huge, sweet, sugary yams. Several boxes beside +it were heaped with onions, cabbages, carrots, +pumpkins, and other vegetables. In another corner +stood a barrel of home-ground corn meal and a big +hogshead of water. Taken all in all, the little +cabin's interior was a sight to fill the two hungry +lads with satisfied anticipation. They had hardly +completed their survey of it when their strange host<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_216" id="Page_216">[216]</a></span> +entered latching and bolting the heavy door behind +him.</p> + +<p>He was a man about forty years of age, strongly +built, but sallow with the sallowness of the native +Floridian. His face was kindly in expression but +stamped on its every line was a look of uneasiness +and apprehension. It was not an expression of +fear but rather the look of a brave man who was +simply on his guard every moment against expected +dangers.</p> + +<p>"I sho' have got to ask you-all to excuse me fur +the way I dun greeted you," he apologized, "but, +you see, strangers are mighty scarse around hyar +an' one has to be plum' careful. I'se powerful glad +to see a new face though—it's been mighty nigh +two years since I had talk with a stranger. I +reckon, you-alls must be some hungry. I'll rustle +up a little supper while you-all gives me your tale."</p> + +<p>With a deftness that indicated long batching experience, +he cut great slices of ham and placed them +to broil over the coals, mixed a pone of corn bread +and put it to bake in a Dutch oven, and buried a +dozen big yams to roast among the embers. While +he was thus engaged, Charley related the story of +their voyage and shipwreck omitting only any mention +of the gold. His story was frequently interrupted +by his host's exclamations, "I swan, an' dew +tell." When the lad had finished, the stranger +beamed upon him with evident pleasure. "I swan,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_217" id="Page_217">[217]</a></span> +hit's jis' like a novel I read once," he declared, "hit +was writ by a fellow called Russell, Clark Russell, +if I don't disremember his name. I don't reckon +his story was true though. I 'lows he just made it +up outer his head—but the vittals is ready now, you-alls +jis' back up to the table thar an' helps yourselves."</p> + +<p>The hungry boys needed no second invitation but +fell to work on the tender juicy ham and sugary +yams with hearty appetites while their host as he +ate, watched them with evident pleasure at their +enjoyment. When all had finished, he put away the +dishes, filled his corn-cob pipe, and leaned back in +his chair against the wall.</p> + +<p>"You-alls can't go back to whar yu left the +captain an' the little nigger to-night, noways," he +observed.</p> + +<p>"No," Charley agreed, "but we would like to +start back early in the morning if we can get a +wagon or a boat."</p> + +<p>"Thar ain't no fitten road for a wagon leading up +the coast," observed their host. "I owns that little +sloop anchored down thar by the dock. I reckon, +you-alls could make out with her. I don't reckon +them Wrights would stop you-alls from going if +they understood jis' how things stood. I don't 'low +they would be so pesky pisen mean as all that. I'd +like to go with you-alls an' see that ole captain an' +that little nigger, I sho' would."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_218" id="Page_218">[218]</a></span></p> + +<p>"We would like to have you go with us," said +Walter, eagerly. "Why can't you?"</p> + +<p>"'Cause I don't ever expect to leave this hyar +cabin alive," said his host, calmly.</p> + +<p>The boys stared at him in uneasy astonishment.</p> + +<p>"No, I ain't crazy," said the man quietly. +"Hush, jis' lis'en' a bit."</p> + +<p>A long prolonged growl came from one of the +dogs outside. The man arose and taking up his +rifle stepped over to the loophole beckoning to the +lads to follow. The moon lit up the little clearing +almost as light as day. The dogs were moving +around outside, sniffing and uttering low growls.</p> + +<p>The boys could see nothing unusual in the clearing +but they felt a sense of danger in the very air. +Their host's eyes, more accustomed to the surroundings +than their own, evidently detected something +ominous in one of the shadows thrown out +from the belt of pines. He thrust the barrel of his +rifle out through the loophole and the next instant +its sharp crack rent the stillness of the night. The +lurking shadow vanished amongst the pines with +a whoop of defiance.</p> + +<p>Their host pulled in his rifle, "A plum' miss," +he said, disgustedly, "Wall, the war is on for fair +now. Better outen that light an' draw your cheers +up by the fire an' I'll tell you'alls about hit."</p> + + +<div class="footnotes"><h3>FOOTNOTE:</h3> + +<div class="footnote"> + +<p><a name="Footnote_A_1" id="Footnote_A_1"></a><a href="#FNanchor_A_1">[A]</a> This account of Judson is the description of a little West +Florida town as it actually has been, and is to-day. Nineteen +of its scanty population have died by a fierce war. The author +has only changed the first letter of the town's real name.</p></div></div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_219" id="Page_219">[219]</a></span></p> + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXIX.<br /> + +<small>THE FEUD.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Thar</span> ain't no call to keep watch at the loopholes," +said their host as the alarmed lads' glances +kept wandering towards the dark openings. "The +dogs will tell we-alls if anyone tries to come near +the cabin." He leaned back in his chair in silence +for a few minutes gazing into the heart of the fire +whose flickering rays lit up his bronzed, thoughtful, +kindly face.</p> + +<p>"Hit all began years ago when I warn't but a +little bit of a shaver," he began, quietly. "Judson +was a right-prosperous, happy, contented, little +place, then. Thar was mighty nigh a hundred people +living in the town, an' in the woods nigh about +hyar. Each family had hit's own little cabin an' +farm an' raised all hit's own living of meat, corn, +taters, an' sugar cane, an' each family had hit's patch +of cotton with which they bought what things they +needed that they didn't raise themselves. We had a +right tidy little schoolhouse. I went to hit two terms +when I was a little shaver," he said with evident<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_220" id="Page_220">[220]</a></span> +pride, "an' I learned how to read an' write pretty +well—the reading's been a heap of company to me +during the years since then. Each family had a +plenty to eat an' wear, an' thar warn't none that +you could call real poor people like I hearn tell you-alls +have in the North. We used to have dances +and barbecues, an' picnics an' a right sociable time. +The town was started by two families, the Turners +an' the Wrights—I'm a Turner,—an' all the people +about was kin to one or the other family, which +made everybody friendly and sociable with each +other. Hit was jis' a little Eden on earth, this +place, 'till the serpent came twisting an' crawlin' in. +The devil must have sho' had a hand in making +some of the men folks believe that the Good Lord +intended the honest corn they raised for anything +but food for man an' beast. Yes, I reckon, hit sho' +must have been ole Satan that made a few of the +Turners an' Wrights get together an' start a little +whiskey still over thar in the woods yonder. The +womin folks was again hit from the start, as, bless +their hearts, they've always been again the cursed +stuff. Hit was Christmas week that the still was +started goin', an' Christmas Eve the ones running +hit gave a big barbecue at the still to celebrate it. +Most everyone went, as they always did to doin's in +the neighborhood. Even my daddy an' two brothers, +Ben an' Abe, went to see the fun as they called +hit, but mammy she was a good, religious woman<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_221" id="Page_221">[221]</a></span>, +she staid at home an' kept me with her. She would +have liked to keep the other boys with her too, but +they had grown out of her control as boys sometimes +do." His bronzed face grew sadly thoughtful, +as he continued, "I recollect, I cried because I +couldn't go too, but mother sang to me an' tole me +stories—mother was a powerful hand at telling the +kind of stories boys like an' I soon quit cryin' an' +went to sleep quiet an' happy with mother singing +to me. Hit was the last time I ever heard mammy +sing. I reckon hit was 'bout midnight when a noise +woke me up. The door had been flung open—hit +was never locked in them days—an' father an' Abe +came rushin' in. Father's face was white as a sheet +an' I'll never forget the look on mammy's face. Hit +seemed as if she knowed without a word from +daddy what had happened. Thar was a curious +tremble in her voice as she asked, 'Whar's Ben?' +At the sound of her voice father broke down an' +sobbed like a child. 'He's dead,' he cried. +'They've killed my boy Ben. Those Wrights have +killed my boy Ben.'"</p> + +<p>The man paused as the recollection of that terrible +scene crowded his mind, while the two lads +looked at each other with sympathetic horror.</p> + +<p>"No one seemed to know just how the trouble +started," went on their host, quietly. "All hands +had taken a little too much liquor, there had been a +few hot words, a blow, an' Ben had keeled over<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_222" id="Page_222">[222]</a></span> +with a knife in his side. Then the fightin' started +between the kin of both families, an' daddy an' Abe +had run home to git their guns. Sore at heart as +mammy was, she begged 'em not to shed no more +blood but to leave it to the cotes, for mammy, as I +have said, was a religious woman. But both +Wrights and Turners came first from the mountains +of Kentucky whar man don't go to law again' +man but settles his quarrels with his rifle, An' so +the blood-feud began. Thar was more than Ben +killed that night,—Wrights as well as Turners. +When all had sobered up from the liquor thar came +a kind of lull or truce, but war always bruk out +again when either families got to drinkin'. They +got Abe the followin' year, but not 'fore he had +shot a couple of Wrights. Hit was three years +afore they got father. Mother, she pined away an' +died soon after they got him. I think she was +kinder glad to go, such things are wearin' on a +woman. An' so the killin's been goin' on ever since +by spells when the liquor gets to flowin'. I am the +only Turner alive, now, though thar's a few of my +kin still scattered around hyar. I've been shot at a +powerful lot of times, but, I reckon, I've been lucky. +Then too, they ain't none of them hunted me so +powerful hard, for I ain't took no part in any of +the killin's. I've shot a couple of times to scare +them away but not to kill. My own kin 'lows that +I'm poor-spirited, but somehow or other, I can't<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_223" id="Page_223">[223]</a></span> +forget the look on mammy's face the night Ben was +killed. I don't want to be the cause of puttin' no +such look on any woman's face. I've knowed all +these years though that my time must come sooner +or later. I heard to-day that the Wrights have got +in a lot of liquor from Tarpon Springs an' they are +sayin' that the last Turner has got to be wiped out +of Judson. So, I got me in a store of water an' +grub an' fixed to lay low for awhile. I may be able +to hold out until their liquor is gone an' the danger +is past, but I reckon hit doan' make so powerful +much of difference. They air plum' sho' to get me +sooner or later. Wall, that's the story, young fellows, +hit's been a right smart relief to have someone +sympathetic to tell hit to. Don't you worry none +though. As soon as comes mornin' I'll hist a flag +of truce an' arrange to have you fellows let out +peaceful. You can take my boat an' go after your +captain an' that little nigger, but I sho' advise you +not to stop hyar on youah way back. Keep right +on to Tarpon Springs. Some of my kin folks kin +bring the sloop back from thar."</p> + +<p>"You are very good," Charley exclaimed. "But +tell me why you have never left this awful place. +There are hundreds of places where you could have +made as good a living and been free from dread and +worry."</p> + +<p>"Mammy's grave is out thar among them pines," +said the man, simply, "an' daddy's, an' Ben's, an'<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_224" id="Page_224">[224]</a></span> +Abe's, then, atter all, this place is home, no other +place could be that."</p> + +<p>"I see," said Charley, much abashed.</p> + +<p>"I am proud to have met you, Mr. Turner," declared +Walter, warmly. "I think you are a noble +man."</p> + +<p>"No? I sho' reckon you is mistaken," said the +man in surprise. "Me noble? I reckon not. My +own kin 'lows I'm mighty poor-spirited 'cause I +won't take no hand in the killin'."</p> + +<p>"I don't care a cent what your kin says," began +Walter, hotly, but he was interrupted by the crack +of a rifle, the whistle of a bullet, and the howl of +a dog outside.</p> + +<p>His host winced as if the bullet had struck his +own body. "They've killed Bet," he cried. "Bet, +what I raised from a little bit of puppy. They +hadn't ought to go an' shoot a poor defenceless, +dumb animal, hit ain't right. My God, be they goin' +to kill all my poor faithful dawgs," he cried, as another +shot rang out followed by another pitiless +howl.</p> + +<p>Rifle shot followed rifle shot while the man stood +trembling with eyes flashing as he listened to the +whining of the animals outside. At last, heedless +of the bullets pattering against the logs, he flung +the door wide open and called to the hounds. They +came crowding in, a whining, mangy, ill-looking +pack, but disreputable as they were, they had been<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_225" id="Page_225">[225]</a></span> +the man's only friends through his lonely years and +the two lads respected him for his act.</p> + +<p>As soon as he had bolted the door again, he rummaged +in a corner and brought out three rifles. He +handed one to each of the boys. "I reckon, we'll +have to watch at the loopholes now the dawgs air +inside," he said quietly. "You-alls can take the +ones at the ends, I'll tend to the sides. Be right +careful 'bout standin' in front of 'em, a bullet might +pass through. An' don't shoot to kill if you can +help it."</p> + +<p>"An' his kin people call that man poor-spirited," +whispered Walter in wonder to his chum as they +took up their positions.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXX.<br /> + +<small>BESIEGED.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> boys had little opportunity for conversation +in their new rôle as guards, being separated from +each other by the length of the cabin. Strange as +was the position in which they found themselves, +they felt but little fear. The massive logs of which +the cabin was constructed bid defiance to the entry +of a bullet, and neither of them could believe that +the affair would amount to more than a few shots<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_226" id="Page_226">[226]</a></span> +being fired at the building while the attacking party +was under the influence of the liquor they had +drank. They believed that with the coming of day +the feudalists would disband and retire to their +homes, while they would be free to return to the +rescue of their friends on the island. Nevertheless, +they were not going to take any chances in the +duties as sentinels. They stood well to one side of +their loopholes and peeped out at the little clearing +plainly visible in the bright moonlight.</p> + +<p>"I reckon they can't see to shot through the loopholes, +but you-alls want to keep youah bodies out of +line with them," cautioned Mr. Turner. "Hit +mought be that a stray bullet would pass through +one of them. An' don't either of you young fellows +fire 'less you jes' have to. You doan't want to get +mixed up in this hyar quarrel. If yu' jis' naturally +have to shoot, aim low an' give it to 'em in the +laigs."</p> + +<p>"There seems to be several of them gathering together +at the edge of the woods," called Charley +anxiously. "Here they come straight for the +house!"</p> + +<p>His host darted to his side. "They've got a long +pole an' air aiming to batter down the door," he announced. +"Keep back, boys, an' let me do the talking +an' shootin', if thar's got to be any."</p> + +<p>But the boys crowded close to his side, eager to +view the coming attack.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_227" id="Page_227">[227]</a></span></p> + +<p>There were about a dozen men in the approaching +party and they advanced at a rapid trot, bearing +between them a huge pine log.</p> + +<p>"Halt whar you air," commanded Turner when +they had approached to within sixty feet of the +house. "If you-alls come any closer meanin' +trouble, someone is goin' to get hurt."</p> + +<p>There were enough of timid spirits in the party +to cause a halt in the advance.</p> + +<p>"We're goin' to get youah hide this time, Bill +Turner," shouted the foremost of the gang, a big, +heavily-whiskered man. "Hit's a disgrace on us +Wrights to have one of youah name livin' still in +this settlement. You're goin' to be done for this +time."</p> + +<p>"Now, I ain't done nothin' to you-alls in all these +years," said Turner quietly and argumentatively. +"You ain't got no cause to come 'round hectoring +me."</p> + +<p>"More shame for you," shouted the big man. +"We're goin' to do you, first, 'cause you're a +Turner, second, 'cause you've been too poor-spirited +all these years to put up a man's fight."</p> + +<p>"Pears lak hit needs a powerful lot of yu to do +fo' one, lone, mean-spirited critter," said Turner, +mildly.</p> + +<p>The big man stamped his foot with rage. "Hit +don't take none but me," he roared. "Yu come out +hyar an' we'll have it out, man to man."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_228" id="Page_228">[228]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I ain't a-doubting you're courage, Jim Wright," +returned the other, slowly, "but I ain't aimin' to +hurt no man 'less I have to. Besides, if I did get +the best of yu, all the rest of youah gang would +come down on me. Jes' keep away from my cabin, +that's all I've got to say."</p> + +<p>"Come on, boys," roared the leader. "He's too +mean-spirited to hurt a fly. He can't shoot all of +us, anyway."</p> + +<p>There was some hesitation, but his fellows, evidently, +believed that the man inside would not fire. +Under the urging of their leader they picked up the +log and started on a run for the door.</p> + +<p>But they quickly discovered their mistake. From +the loophole shot out quick jets of flame as the man +inside worked the lever of his Winchester. The log +dropped unheeded to the ground as its bearers +broke for the cover of the woods. Some were not +able to run but limped away groaning with pain. +After the fleeing ones strode the big leader, cursing +them for cowards and imploring them to return to +the assault.</p> + +<p>"I don't reckon I've hurt any one of them very +much," Turner remarked, as he slipped more shells +into his rifle. "I jes' aimed for their laigs."</p> + +<p>"Thank God, it has all ended without loss of +life," Charley said earnestly, but his host shook his +head.</p> + +<p>"Hit ain't ended, hit's jes' begun, Jim Wright<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_229" id="Page_229">[229]</a></span> +ain't one to be scart out by a little lead. He don't +know what fear is. If he can't get none of 'em to +come back with him, he'll come back alone. I wish +you young fellows were safe outer hyar, but it +won't do for you to try to leave now. Crazy drunk, +like them fellows is, hit wouldn't be safe for you. +Maybe by morning they'll be sobered up enough to +listen to reason."</p> + +<p>In spite of his words, the boys were hopeful that +the night would pass off without further trouble, +but they were soon undeceived. Half an hour had +not passed when the big leader emerged from the +woods followed by a half a dozen of his fellow +feudalists.</p> + +<p>His followers halted by the fallen log but he advanced +boldly direct for the loophole.</p> + +<p>"Keep away, for Gawd's sake, keep away, Jim," +Turner implored. "I don't want to have to shoot +you."</p> + +<p>"Hit's you or me this time!" shouted the other, +"The sun don't rise on no living Turner in this +town."</p> + +<p>"Keep back," warned Turner, thrusting his rifle +through the loophole, but even in his desperate situation, +the boys, crowded close beside him, and could +see that he aimed only at the legs of the advancing +man.</p> + +<p>Ruffian though he was, the other was not without +brute courage. He never paused in his advance.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_230" id="Page_230">[230]</a></span> +"Shoot," he shouted as he whipped out a pistol, +"Shoot, that's what I want yu to do."</p> + +<p>The two reports came almost together, but the +pistol shot was a fraction of a second ahead of the +other. Like a fire-swept weed Turner crumpled to +the floor, his rifle exploding as he fell.</p> + +<p>The big man clapped one hand to his side and fell +to the ground.</p> + +<p>With the report of his rifle, his followers had +grabbed up the log and rushed for the door, but +Charley had been quick to see the danger. Snatching +up the rifle from the fallen man, he fired at the +moving legs as fast as he could work the lever. The +whistling lead was more than the assaulters could +stand. Three dropped their hold on the log and +limped hurriedly for cover while their fellows, deprived +of their aid, could no longer sustain the +heavy timber, which sank again to the ground while +they hastened after their wounded companions.</p> + +<p>The boys watched them in silence until they entered +the woods then Charley set down the rifle.</p> + +<p>"I don't think they will be back right away +again," he said. "Anyway, we have got to risk a +light. Perhaps Mr. Turner is not dead."</p> + +<p>With hands that trembled with excitement Walter +struck a match and lit the lamp, then, the two boys +lifted the prostrate man and laid him upon the bed. +"Keep watch at the loophole while I see if anything +can be done for him," Charley commanded.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_231" id="Page_231">[231]</a></span></p> + +<p>The man's shirt was matted with blood and the +lad did not attempt to take it off, but cut it away +with his sheath knife, exposing the white chest in +the center of which gapped a horrible hole. "He's +badly wounded," he announced after a careful +examination of the wound. "There's two holes, +one in his chest and one in his side. I believe +the bullet struck a rib and glanced, coming out at his +side. If so, he will pull through if I can only +stop the blood flowing. I'll have to keep this lamp +lit for awhile even it is risky. I'll be as quick as +I can."</p> + +<p>There was little in the rude cabin with which +to do in such a case, but the resourceful lad made +the best of the situation, working with feverish +speed so as to be able to extinguish the lamp as +soon as possible. First, he washed out the wash +basin thoroughly and filling it with clean water +from the barrel added to the water a generous handful +of salt. With this he washed the ugly-looking +wound, then tearing into pieces a fresh sheet he +found lying on a shelf, he made a little wad of rags +with which, after soaking them in salt water, he +plugged up the gaping hole. Over this he bound +wet strips of the sheet to hold it securely in place. +He was rewarded for his labor by seeing that the +flow of blood was quickly checked and soon ceased +entirely. As soon as he made certain of this, he +extinguished the light and crept to his chum's side.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_232" id="Page_232">[232]</a></span></p> + +<p>"I think he will pull out all right," he announced. +"He is unconscious yet, and when he does come to +he'll be very weak from loss of blood. Have you +seen any more of those fellows?"</p> + +<p>"They're still in the woods around the clearing. +Listen and you'll hear their voices every now and +then."</p> + +<p>"Has the man who was shot moved any?"</p> + +<p>"No, he lays just as he fell. I guess he's dead."</p> + +<p>"It's a horrible affair," said Charley with a shudder. +"I'll never forget this night. It has put us in +a bad fix. We can't leave here now, and I don't +like the way the wind is coming up. If there's a +heavy storm, the captain and Chris will be in danger, +it wouldn't take a very heavy sea to cover that +marsh. Just listen how it's blowing."</p> + +<p>Walter seemed not to hear what his chum was +saying. He stood staring out at the still figure +stretched on the ground. "He hasn't moved, but +maybe he isn't dead," he said at last. "Perhaps, he +is bleeding to death and a little attention might save +his life."</p> + +<p>"You're right," Charley exclaimed. "We must +bring him in."</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_233" id="Page_233">[233]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXI.<br /> + +<small>THE ENEMIES.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">It</span> was a risky thing to attempt. To venture outside +would be to expose themselves in the bright +moonlight to the bullets of the feudalists, but the +two plucky lads never hesitated. The body lay not a +dozen steps from the cabin and it would not do to +let his fellows approach that close to the little fort. +Either they must save him themselves, if he was not +already dead, or leave him to die alone in the night.</p> + +<p>"We must be quick about it," Charley declared. +"As soon as I unlatch the door, we must run out, +grab him by the shoulders, and drag him in—he's +too heavy to lift."</p> + +<p>In this bold move fortune seemed to favor the +lads. They got their heavy burden to the door before +a shot was fired and, then, the bullets whistled +harmlessly above their heads.</p> + +<p>"We were lucky that time," Charley panted as +he barred the door again. "Now keep a sharp +lookout. I'll have to light that lamp again."</p> + +<p>"This fellow is not so very badly hurt," he announced,<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_234" id="Page_234">[234]</a></span> +as soon as he had examined his new patient. +"The bullet has gone right through the +fleshy part of his shoulder. He will come out of it +all right if the wound is kept clean." In a few minutes +he had washed and dressed the wound as he +had the other man's, then, putting out the light once +more, he rejoined his companion at the loophole. +"Anything stirring?" he inquired.</p> + +<p>"No, I don't even hear their voices now. Perhaps +they will not bother us again to-night," Walter +replied, hopefully.</p> + +<p>"I am not worrying about them as much as I +am this wind," said his chum gloomily. "We are +safe enough here so long as the grub and water +holds out, but, God knows how it is faring with +Chris and the captain."</p> + +<p>The gale was now howling and whistling around +the little cabin with a force to justify Charley's +gloomy apprehension. The boys had to speak +loudly to make themselves heard above its uproar. +They soon abandoned all attempts at conversation +and waited wearily and silently for another assault +from the feudalists and for the coming of day.</p> + +<p>Either the ruffians had at last become over-powered +by the liquor they had drank or else they had +decided to wait the coming of day, for they did not +again show themselves in the clearing. Day, however, +came at last, after what seemed to the exhausted +lads an age of waiting.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_235" id="Page_235">[235]</a></span></p> + +<p>As soon as it became light enough to see, Charley +removed the bandages from their stricken host and +redressed his wound more carefully. "His pulse is +getting stronger and there is some color in his face," +he remarked to his chum. "I believe, I could bring +him to, but I guess it's best to let him lie unconscious +as long as he can. He will suffer enough +when he does regain consciousness."</p> + +<p>As soon as he finished with Turner, Charley +turned to his other patient who was beginning to +move uneasily and show signs of returning consciousness. +While he was yet bathing his wound +the man opened his eyes.</p> + +<p>"Gosh! how my shoulder hurts," he growled. +"Be mighty careful how you touch it, young fellow, +or I'll skin you alive."</p> + +<p>Charley set aside the basin of water and rising +to his feet looked down on the fellow with a face +full of scorn.</p> + +<p>"You great, big, drunken, cowardly murderer," +he exclaimed. "It's a pity that bullet didn't kill +you. You are not fit to live on God's green earth. +You're shot when trying, with a crowd of your fellows, +to kill a lone, inoffensive man. Your friends +don't think enough of you to come back and get +your carcass. We bring you in and care for you +and instead of thanks, your first words are a growl +and a threat. You are a cowardly, disgraceful +cur,—that's what you are."</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_236" id="Page_236">[236]</a></span></p> + +<p>Astonished rage filled the man's face. "No man +ever said words like that to Jim Wright and lived," +he gasped. He attempted to rise but was too weak +to gain his feet, and sank back with a groan.</p> + +<p>"Oh, I guess you won't do any killing for a little +while," sneered Charley, whose anger was at white +heat. "I've no doubt people have been afraid to +tell you the truth before, but you are going to hear +it for once in your life. I've no doubt with your +strength and disposition you've bullied everything +until they are afraid to do anything but flatter you, +but, now you are going to take a dose of your own +medicine." Then, seating himself just out of reach +of the man's powerful arms, he proceeded to tell +him what he thought of him in words that stung +with contempt and scorn. Then, as his anger subsided, +he repeated the story Turner had told him, +contrasting Turner's quiet, patient, peaceful heroism +with the other's blood-thirstiness and violence, +with all the power of the earnestness he felt.</p> + +<p>At first the man kept interrupting him with curses +and abuse, but as he went calmly on ignoring the interruptions +the fellow lay quiet, his face turned to +the wall.</p> + +<p>Once Charley stopped, thinking he might have +fainted he lay so still, but he spoke up gruffly.</p> + +<p>"Did I kill him?"</p> + +<p>"No, but it's not your fault that you didn't," the +lad replied, curtly, and went on with his arraignment.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_237" id="Page_237">[237]</a></span> +"I don't care a hang what you and your +cowardly fellows think," he concluded, "all decent +people would say that that poor fellow lying there +is a brave hero while you are the mean-spirited, +cowardly one. And, now, if you'll lie quiet and +keep your mouth shut, I'll dress that wound. I hate +to pollute my hands by touching you, but it's got to +be done."</p> + +<p>The man lay quiet while the lad washed and +bound up his wound. Charley could see that his +features were working convulsively, but whether +from rage or pain he could not determine.</p> + +<p>As soon as his task was completed, Charley relieved +his chum at the loophole and Walter set about +making coffee and cooking some breakfast. They +were both sadly in need of food and felt much +better after they had eaten. As soon as they had +finished, Charley made his chum lie down to take a +nap, promising to call him, and lie down himself in +a couple of hours.</p> + +<p>While Walter was asleep Turner came out of the +deep swoon which had followed his wound. He was +weak and in terrible pain but in full possession of +his senses. It was evident that he was greatly bewildered +at the sight of his enemy lying helpless on +the floor, and Charley explained the situation to him +in a few words.</p> + +<p>"I sho' am glad I didn't kill him," said the sick +man, thankfully. "I jes' shot at his laigs, the gun<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_238" id="Page_238">[238]</a></span> +must have gone off when I fell. I am sho' sorry I +hurt you so bad, Jim, I didn't aim for to do hit."</p> + +<p>But Wright kept his face turned to the wall and +answered not a word.</p> + +<p>As the morning advanced Charley was much puzzled +by the constant sound of hammering coming +from the woods near the clearing. It was evident +their enemies were preparing another surprise but +he could not guess at its nature.</p> + +<p>All the morning long the hammering continued, +then shortly before noon there emerged from the +woods an object which caused him at first, to stare +in bewildered surprise, and, then, as it drew nearer +the cabin to send him to shaking Walter, whom he +had let sleep on.</p> + +<p>"Wake up! Wake up!" he cried. "We have +got to fight for our lives. Those fellows have built +a heavy breastwork on the front of a wagon and +are shoving it ahead of them up to the cabin."</p> + +<p>"Young fellows! help me up and help me to that +loophole," gruffly commanded the wounded man on +the floor. "Don't hesitate," he cried as the lad was +about to refuse the surprising command, "them fellows +have got a couple of sticks of dynamite in that +cart an' if they get near enough to throw it thar +won't be enough left of this cabin to make a good +toothpick. We was aiming to use it last night if +we couldn't get Turner no other way."</p> + +<p>Between them the two startled lads got the big<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_239" id="Page_239">[239]</a></span> +fellow on his feet and supported him to the loophole +where he leaned against the logs, his face +twitching with the pain of his effort.</p> + +<p>It was just in time, for the wagon with its burden +of death was scarce a hundred feet away when he +shouted: "Stop where yer are, boys. Thar ain't +no call to throw any of that stuff."</p> + +<p>"Is that you, Cap?" called one of the men. +"Why, we 'lowed yer was dead."</p> + +<p>"An' I might have been for all of yu fellows, +leaving me to die on the ground like a poisoned +dog."</p> + +<p>He paused while a chorus of excuses came from +the men behind the breastwork.</p> + +<p>"Well, I ain't dead, but it ain't no thanks to yu +fellows," he went on slowly and painfully. "Now, +yu fellows jes' roll that wagon back whar hit came +from an' go home and behave yerselves. Yu fellows +know me an' know I'll do what I say. Hit's +jes' come to me, an' hit's come in a powerful rough +way, that I've been powerful mean, pisen an' onery. +My eyes am sho' opened at last, an' I'm powerful +ashamed of how I've been carryin' on. But hit's all +over now. From now on Bill Turner is my friend, +an' the man that lifts a finger again' him lifts it +again' me, an' me an' my close kin will make this +place too hot to hold him. That's all I've got to say. +Now, go home."</p> + +<p>Murmurs of astonishment arose from the men<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_240" id="Page_240">[240]</a></span> +behind the wagon as they slowly but obediently +backed the wagon towards the woods. Over the +face of the wounded man on the bed stole a look of +joy unspeakable.</p> + +<p>The bewildered but delighted boys helped Wright +back to his place on the floor.</p> + +<p>"I want to shake hands with you, Mr. Wright," +said Charley, earnestly. "I am afraid I talked +pretty rough to you."</p> + +<p>"I needed hit," said the other as he took the proffered +hand. "Hit's a pity, young fellow, that thar +ain't more like yu down in this neck of thar woods."</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXII.<br /> + +<small>THE CASTAWAYS AGAIN.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">Leaving</span> the boys safe from the danger that had +threatened them, let us return to the castaways +whom we left confronted by that menace, the most +grewsome of all to shipwrecked sailors, the lack of +water.</p> + +<p>The sponger captain needed no explanation but +the captain's simple words to realize the terrible +tortures and awful death that awaited them all if +help in some shape did not soon come to their rescue.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_241" id="Page_241">[241]</a></span> +His bronzed face grew white beneath it's coat of +tan.</p> + +<p>"I am frightfully thirsty, already," he exclaimed, +"Is there no way we can reach the mainland. +Thar's water in plenty thar."</p> + +<p>"If we were birds or fish, we might get thar, I +reckon," replied Captain Westfield, "but, being as +we are only human beings, I calculate it ain't no way +possible."</p> + +<p>The Conch eyed the raging water that stretched +between the little island and the shore.</p> + +<p>"A strong swimmer might make it," he observed, +musingly. "I've swum farther many a time but it +was when I was in a sight better shape than I am +now."</p> + +<p>"Yes, I reckon a right powerful swimmer might +make it," assented the captain, "but this little fellow +and I are not equal to it, we'd never reach the +land."</p> + +<p>"I believe I could do it even now," said the +sponger calculatingly, "but I won't desert yo' two +Yo' saved my life an' I'd be worse than a Greek to +leave yo' here."</p> + +<p>"If you can do it, go ahead, man," said the old +sailor. "You can't do us any good by staying. +Better save your own life," but the Conch shook his +head sadly.</p> + +<p>"My life ain't worth much, now," he said sadly.<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_242" id="Page_242">[242]</a></span> +"My little ship's gone, all my brave comrades +drowned, an' everything I had in the world lost. +I've not much to live for now."</p> + +<p>"Bosh, man," said the old sailor, "I reckon, +thar's always something for a man to live for as +long as the Good Lord let him live. If thar wasn't +the Lord wouldn't let him live."</p> + +<p>But the Conch was not to be comforted, the full +extent of his loss was beginning to make itself felt +as he regained his strength and the full possession +of his senses after his terrible ordeal. He soon +moved a little apart from the two castaways, and, +seating himself on the sand buried his face in his +hands. The two watchers could see the tears trickling +between his fingers and they turned away +greatly moved at that most impressive of sights, +the grief of a strong man, ashamed of displaying +his tears. When they looked again he was on his +knees and his bowed head showed that he was praying. +When he rejoined them, his manner was filled +with the calm and quietness of one who has found +peace for his afflictions.</p> + +<p>"I see there is no wood here with which to build +a raft," he observed. "Things look pretty bad, +but they say the darkest hour is just before the +dawn. We must take courage. Yo'r young friends +may return with help at any hour."</p> + +<p>The captain shook his head sadly. "Something +has happened to them or they would have been back<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_243" id="Page_243">[243]</a></span> +long ago. They cannot return now until the storm +is over."</p> + +<p>"It cannot last much longer," declared the Conch, +confidently. "It is losing force now, I believe it +will blow out by morning."</p> + +<p>"Maybe, but it will take a long time for the sea to +go down so a boat can live in it, and, in the meantime +we have no water."</p> + +<p>"We must not give way to despair," said the +Conch, who seemed like another man after his +devotions. "Let's dig another well right in the +midst of the island, perhaps we can get water fit to +drink."</p> + +<p>With but little hope the three fell to work and by +noon had dug a hole to water, but they had only +their labor for their pains, the water was salt, bitter, +and undrinkable. Indeed their labor was worse +than fruitless for their exertions had greatly increased +their thirst.</p> + +<p>Chris kindled a fire and roasted some of the turtle +meat and eggs, but the castaways only partook of a +few mouthfuls, as eating seemed but to increase +their thirst.</p> + +<p>The Conch had lost his hat when wrecked and +Chris, observing his bare head, set about braiding +him another hat from the green palmetto leaves.</p> + +<p>The Sponger watched him with interest. "Do +yo' think yo' could make a water-tight mat of that +stuff?" he enquired, eagerly.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_244" id="Page_244">[244]</a></span></p> + +<p>"Golly! I reckon, dis nigger could," declared +the little darkey. "I'se done made baskets ob hit dat +would hold water like a bucket."</p> + +<p>"How long would it take yo' to make a mat four +feet square?"</p> + +<p>The little negro considered, "I guess I could do +hit in a day."</p> + +<p>"Then drop that hat business and get to work on +hit. Work like yo' never did before. There's a +chance, jes' a chance, that it will be the saving of +us. Captain, there is work for us to do. Get the +entrails out of one of those turtle shells. Clean +them out good, pack them full of sand, and stretch +them out in the sun to dry. I've got a plan in mind. +It may fail, but it's worth trying. Be careful not +to break the skins."</p> + +<p>It was evident from the man's manner that he +was intensely in earnest and the old sailor lost no +time in asking idle questions but went quickly to +work at the task assigned him. In a short time he +had cleaned and washed out the turtle entrails and +filling them with dry sand stretched them out to dry +in the hot sun. When thus prepared they formed a +kind of small hose some thirty feet in length.</p> + +<p>While he was thus engaged, the Conch dragged +the empty shell down to the water and cleaned and +washed it out thoroughly. Leaving it near the +water's edge, he collected and piled close beside it, a +heap of dry wood. Then he returned to where<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_245" id="Page_245">[245]</a></span> +Chris was working and fell to helping him by stripping +and preparing the palmetto buds for the little +darkey's nimble fingers.</p> + +<p>Just before sundown he carefully removed the +sand from the dried entrails and was in possession +of a long, tough waterproof hose without hole or +break in it.</p> + +<p>Night brought no cessation of the strange labor. +A fire was kindled beside the little darkey and he +plaited on by its light while the captain and the +Conch kept him supplied with palmetto strips.</p> + +<p>About midnight Chris held up his work with a +weary sigh; "Hit's done," he announced.</p> + +<p>"Now for the test," cried the Conch, trembling +with excitement.</p> + +<p>Taking the strong, flexible, green mat he hurried +down to the turtle shell which he had filled half full +of sea water. Placing the mat over the top of the +shell, he bound it firmly in place with wisps of +palmetto leaves. Then, cutting a small hole in the +center of the mat, he inserted in it one end of the +strange hose, packing wet sand around it to make it +air-tight. He next coiled down the hose in the edge +of the sea and placed the other end of it in the +empty turtle shell. Then, heaping wood around +the mat-covered shell, he started a fire.</p> + +<p>The Captain and Chris at last understood his +plan. With his rude contrivance, he was going to +try to distill fresh water from salt after the manner<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_246" id="Page_246">[246]</a></span> +they do on big steamships with costly and complicated +apparatus. The steam from the heated water +was supposed to escape from the shell through the +hose. In passing through it it would become chilled +when the hose was coiled down in the cold sea +water and, condensing into water again, reach the +other shell fresh and free from salt.</p> + +<p>In theory the plan was perfect, but would the +rude contrivance do the work?</p> + +<p>The three thirsty watchers fairly held their breath +as they kept the fire roaring around the shell and +awaited results. At last tiny wisps of steam began +to trickle through the closely-woven mat. Tiny +drops of moisture were dropping from the end of +the hose. These grew larger and larger until at last +a tiny stream of water trickled forth.</p> + +<p>They danced and shouted for joy. "It works! +It works!" they cried.</p> + +<p>But thirsty though they were they had to possess +their souls in patience and wait for the process +worked very slowly. All night they staid by the +shells keeping the fire going. Just at day-break the +Conch gave the command to put out the fire. In +the other shell was several gallons of clear, pure +water. As soon as it had cooled sufficiently they +dipped it up with shells and drank greedily. It was +slightly bitter and tasteless but never did drink taste +better to parched throats. With the satisfying of +their thirst, came hunger and they all made a hearty<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_247" id="Page_247">[247]</a></span> +meal off the roasted meat and eggs left from dinner. +Just as the sun arose they lay down to sleep completely +exhausted but with thankfulness to God in +their hearts. Their greatest danger was past. They +had water and food in abundance, and the storm +was slowly but surely subsiding.</p> + +<p>They slept through the long day, awakening only +when the shades of night began to fall. Then after +satisfying their hunger and thirst, they lay down +and slept until morning came.</p> + +<p>They opened their eyes upon a clear, still day. +The storm had gone and the sea was growing calm. +Far to the South there showed on the blue water a +tiny patch of white,—a sail.</p> + + + +<hr class="chap" /> +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIII.<br /> + +<small>THE RESCUE.</small></h2> + + +<p><span class="smcap">The</span> castaways watched the distant sail with +mingled feelings of joy and suspense. Was it the +boys, or was it merely a strange craft beating up +the coast? Would it pass near the island or would +it go by too far out for them to make their presence +known? These were the questions they debated as +they strained their eyes on the distant patch of +white.</p> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_248" id="Page_248">[248]</a></span></p> + +<p>One thing soon became evident to the eager +watchers, the sail was steadily growing larger. Although +the storm had passed and the sea subsided +there was still a brisk breeze blowing and each passing +hour brought the stranger craft visibly nearer. +No thought of breakfast entered the castaways' +minds, all their attention was fixed on the approaching +sail.</p> + +<p>At last it became evident that the vessel was a +small sloop, that it was headed directly for the +island and that it was rolling and pitching frightfully +in the still heavy seas.</p> + +<p>On it came, plunging and tossing like a frightened +steed and sending showers of spray from its +cut water. At last it was close enough to discover +two figures on its decks, one at the wheel, the other +forward, tending the jib sheet.</p> + +<p>"Hit's Massa Charley and Massa Walter," +shouted the sharp-eyed Chris. "Praise de Lawd, +Praise de Lawd," and his over-joyed companions +shouted a fervent "Amen."</p> + +<p>The sloop came steadily on, passing the island +and rounding up under its lee as near as its young +captain dared to approach. Anchor was dropped, +sails lowered, and launching a small boat it carried +on deck, its crew of two came sculling for the shore.</p> + +<p>And what a demonstration of joy there was +when it grounded on the sands and the chums so<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_249" id="Page_249">[249]</a></span> +long separated and so long beset with perils were +once more reunited. Such hand-wringings and congratulations, +and eager questions and chorused answers. +All happy. All excited. All talking at +once, and no one making himself thoroughly understood +in the general clamor.</p> + +<p>But Charley soon interrupted the talk-feast. +"We will be here all day at this rate," he said, +laughing. "We had better get on board and get +under way. That sloop is pretty old and cranky for +these waters and we'd better get back as soon as +we can for fear another squall will come up. We +can tell our stories on the way."</p> + +<p>The suggestion was wise and as none cared to +linger long on the dreary little island which had +been the scene of so much anxiety and suffering, +there was no delay in carrying it out. All climbed +into the little boat and were carried out to the sloop. +Her sails were hoisted, her anchor weighed, and +her bowsprit headed South for Tarpon. Down in +the sloop's cabin the castaways found a hot meal of +ham, eggs, potatoes and coffee waiting for them, +which Walter had prepared as a pleasant surprise. +In their excitement they had forgotten they were +hungry, but they remembered it now and fell upon +the tasty food with appetites that only left bare +dishes when satisfied, at last. The boys had brought +a pile of clothing with them, and after a wash-down +in cool sea water, the castaways threw away their<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_250" id="Page_250">[250]</a></span> +soiled, tattered garments, and, fed, washed, and +freshly clothed, felt like new men.</p> + +<p>The Captain's eyes danced with joy when Walter +presented him with a pipe and tobacco he had +brought with him.</p> + +<p>Later all gathered around the wheel and stories +and experiences were exchanged, but the reader is +already familiar with the most of them.</p> + +<p>"Even after the trouble was all over we couldn't +get away at once," Charley said, concluding his tale. +"I can tell you we were worried to have to lay +around and wait for the storm to pass, knowing that +you and Chris must be in danger on the island. The +people were awfully good to us after the feud was +ended. They could not do enough for us. They +even wanted to give us money, but of course we +couldn't take that. As soon as the wind went down +we borrowed this boat of Mr. Turner and started +out. We are to leave her at Tarpon and he will get +her from there."</p> + +<p>"Well, all's well that ends well, I reckon," said +the captain, puffing in supreme content. "We are +safe an' well now an' while we ain't got much +money, we will have the 'Beauty' as soon as she +comes into port, an' she's jes' the same as two thousand +dollars in the bank."</p> + +<p>"And we will have another try for that gold +when we get her," Charley declared. "I figure +that those fellows had to cast loose during the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_251" id="Page_251">[251]</a></span> +storm and scud before it. They could not ride it +out at anchor. Now that the buoy's gone, it will +take them a long time to locate the gold again. We, +knowing the latitude and longitude can get back +to the spot before they can find it and get all the +gold removed, if we can get a revenue cutter at +Tarpon, as I think we can."</p> + +<p>The Captain's face was filled with dismay. "I've +clean forgot the figures, boys," he exclaimed. "I +put it down in the log all ship-shape, the latitude and +longitude, but I've clean forgot what it was. I +ain't got no memory for figures."</p> + +<p>It was a heavy blow for the golden-hopes of the +two boys and a silence of disappointment followed +the old sailor's announcement.</p> + +<p>"It's no use crying over spilt milk," said Charley, +at last, cheerfully. "We have still got the schooner, +and, with the money we get from her, we can make +a good start at something else."</p> + +<p>"You have still good cause for rejoicing," observed +the sponger captain. "You will still have +your vessel, but I have lost my all."</p> + +<p>The two chums were not the boys to give way to +repining and they were soon again as bright and +cheerful spirits as if their brightest hopes had been +realized.</p> + +<p>It was midnight when the little sloop at last crept +into the harbor of Tarpon. It was useless to go +ashore at such an hour so the little party made<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_252" id="Page_252">[252]</a></span> +everything snug aboard and turned in on deck for +a few hours' sleep.</p> + +<p>They were up early next morning, and, after a +hasty breakfast, hurried ashore to notify the Commissioner +of their arrival and get him to take steps +for the seizure of the "Beauty" as soon as she +reached port.</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver was standing out in front of his +store as they came up the street. Amazement and +incredulity filled his face when he sighted them.</p> + +<p>"You!" he cried, "Why, I thought you were all +at the bottom of the Gulf."</p> + +<p>"No, we are slightly disfigured but still in the +ring," laughed Charley as he shook hands. "Our +schooner has not come in yet, has she?"</p> + +<p>Mr. Driver stared at him for a second. "There's +a mystery here," he declared. "Come on into the +store, and let's hear your story."</p> + +<p>Seated in the store's little back room, Charley +recounted their adventures while Mr. Driver listened +attentively. When he had concluded, Mr. Driver +remained silent for a moment.</p> + +<p>"I hate to be the teller of bad news," he said, at +last, "but you must learn it, and it had better come +from a friend. Your schooner is lost with all hands +on board."</p> + +<p>"Lost!" cried all together.</p> + +<p>"Yes, she went down at anchor during the storm. +The Greek sponger 'Zenephone' was passing when<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_253" id="Page_253">[253]</a></span> +she went under. Not a man was saved. Every one +on the 'Zenephone' wondered why she did not scud +before it instead of hanging to her anchor. I understand +now. They did not want to leave the +neighborhood of the gold."</p> + +<p>It was a heavy blow. At one sweep they were +robbed of their all. The little band of chums sat +paralyzed with grief, looking helplessly at each +other. Mr. Driver arose quietly and closed the door +softly behind him, leaving them alone with their +grief.</p> + +<p>For a few moments no one spoke. "It's hard, +but it must be met," sighed Walter at last. "What +are we going to do? We have nothing left now, +not even the clothes we wear."</p> + +<p>"God knows," answered Charley, hopelessly, at a +loss for once. "I suppose we will have to hunt +work at something or other."</p> + +<p>"And likely be scattered and separated for the +first time in years," exclaimed the captain.</p> + +<p>"That's the worst of it," agreed Walter, sadly. +"I don't mind working but I hate for us all to +have to drift apart."</p> + +<p>"Me too," wailed Chris. "Golly! I don't want +to be with no one but you-alls."</p> + +<p>"I don't believe the 'Beauty' is lost," Charley +declared. "I believe this is just another of Manuel's +tricks. He is as sharp a rascal as ever lived. I'll bet +she is safe and sound somewhere and that Manuel<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_254" id="Page_254">[254]</a></span> +just bought the Greeks on the 'Zenephone' to tell +that story."</p> + +<p>"Maybe," admitted the captain, doubtfully. +"The story rings true, though. It would have been +likely for them to hang to their anchor by the gold."</p> + +<p>"And it would be just the kind of details Manuel +would think of, knowing we would be more likely +to believe the story if we escaped alive. He is an +artist at rascality."</p> + +<p>"Even if you're right, I reckon it won't help us +much," said the old sailor. "The story's tied our +hands all right. The Commissioner won't do anything +just on our suspicions, an' we ain't got any +money to do anything ourselves."</p> + +<p>"I feel that Charley is right," Walter declared, +"but we've got only one chance to prove it. Get to +work, get some money and hire a Greek detective to +look into the matter for us. The first question is, +what can we do to earn money?"</p> + +<p>They were engaged in a fruitless discussion on +this point when Mr. Driver entered. He heard +their discussion with sympathetic interest.</p> + +<p>"There is no work around here," he declared. +"The Greeks work cheaper than an American can. +It's hard for an American to earn a bare living here. +I understand from what you say that you do not +want to be separated. I might find work for one of +you, but I couldn't for all. There is only one suggestion +I can make in such a case."</p> + +<p>"Please give it to us," Walter requested.</p> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<p><span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_255" id="Page_255">[255]</a></span></p> + + + + +<h2>CHAPTER XXXIV.<br /> + +<small>CONCLUSION.</small></h2> + + +<p>"<span class="smcap">Well</span>," said Mr. Driver, "there is a large fish-house +at Clearwater, twenty miles below here. You +probably could get a job fishing for it. You could +all work together then. It is hard, dirty work but +there is pretty good money in it if a man works +hard."</p> + +<p>The chums exchanged glances.</p> + +<p>"I believe we will try it," Charley said. "Of +course we will have to talk it over before we decide, +but there does not seem to be anything else we can +do."</p> + +<p>"Very well," said Mr. Driver, "I'll give you a +letter to the fish boss, I know him personally. And +you'll need a little money to pay your fares there. +You can return it when you get to earning."</p> + +<p>The chums thanked the kind-hearted storekeeper +for his advice and assistance and adjourned to the +sidewalk where they discussed the matter earnestly. +It did not take them long to decide to follow Mr. +Driver's suggestion. They bid good-bye to the<span class="pagenum"><a name="Page_256" id="Page_256">[256]</a></span> +sponger captain, who decided to remain in Tarpon +and try to get service on one of Mr. Williams' +schooners, and, accepting the loan of ten dollars, +which Mr. Driver pressed upon them, they boarded +the first train going South and soon landed in the +little town of Clearwater. And there, we must leave +them for the present.</p> + + +<div class='center'><br />THE END.</div> + +<hr class="chap" /> + +<div class='tnote'><div class='center'><b>Transcriber's Notes:</b></div> + +<p>Obvious punctuation errors repaired. The original text had no table of +contents. One was created to aid the reader. Chapter I is untitled.</p> + +<p>Page 3, "tatooed" changed to "tattooed" (tattooed arms and rolling)</p> + +<p>Page 10, two lines were transposed. The original read:</p> + +<div class='poem2'> +shouted, as the smiling Greek shrugged his shoul-<br /> +up with the money by to-morrow night I'll close up<br /> +ders. "You know what I say. If you don't come<br /> +this place and have you prosecuted for obtaining<br /> +</div> + +<p>Page 14, "hundreth" changed "hundredth" (a hundredth part of)</p> + +<p>Page 43, "alloted" changed to "allotted" (allotted to their boat)</p> + +<p>Page 62, "along" changed to "alone" (worse than being alone)</p> + +<p>Page 74, repeated word "see" removed from text Original read: (I don't see see +what his object)</p> + +<p>Page 78, "Manual" changed to "Manuel" (Manuel approached Captain)</p> + +<p>Page 85, "blow" changed to "below" (been below for only)</p> + +<p>Page 89, "exclaimation" changed to "exclamation" (an exclamation of surprise)</p> + +<p>Page 93, "captian" changed to "captain" (the captain declared)</p> + +<p>Page 100, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (gaping hole in her)</p> + +<p>Page 101, "was" changed to "were" (There were no)</p> + +<p>Page 102, "that" changed to "than" (time than it has)</p> + +<p>Page 105, "aim" changed to "air" (working +the air pump)</p> + +<p>Page 109, "baton" changed to "beaten" (Greeks had been +badly beaten)</p> + +<p>Page 128, "averge" changed to "average" (better than average marksmen)</p> + +<p>Page 164, "squaking" changed "squawking" (marsh hens, the squawking)</p> + +<p>Page 190, "minues" changed to "minutes" (in a few minutes he)</p> + +<p>Page 203, "taveling" changed to "traveling" (further traveling dangerous)</p> + +<p>Page 231, repeated word "is" removed from text. Original read: (awhile +even it is is risky)</p> + +<p>Page 231, "gapping" changed to "gaping" (up the gaping hole)</p> +</div> + + + + + + + + + +<pre> + + + + + +End of the Project Gutenberg EBook of The Boy Chums in the Gulf of Mexico, by +Wilmer M. Ely + +*** END OF THIS PROJECT GUTENBERG EBOOK BOY CHUMS IN GULF OF MEXICO *** + +***** This file should be named 44394-h.htm or 44394-h.zip ***** +This and all associated files of various formats will be found in: + http://www.gutenberg.org/4/4/3/9/44394/ + +Produced by The Online Distributed Proofreading Team at +http://www.pgdp.net + + +Updated editions will replace the previous one--the old editions +will be renamed. + +Creating the works from public domain print editions means that no +one owns a United States copyright in these works, so the Foundation +(and you!) can copy and distribute it in the United States without +permission and without paying copyright royalties. Special rules, +set forth in the General Terms of Use part of this license, apply to +copying and distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works to +protect the PROJECT GUTENBERG-tm concept and trademark. Project +Gutenberg is a registered trademark, and may not be used if you +charge for the eBooks, unless you receive specific permission. If you +do not charge anything for copies of this eBook, complying with the +rules is very easy. You may use this eBook for nearly any purpose +such as creation of derivative works, reports, performances and +research. They may be modified and printed and given away--you may do +practically ANYTHING with public domain eBooks. Redistribution is +subject to the trademark license, especially commercial +redistribution. + + + +*** START: FULL LICENSE *** + +THE FULL PROJECT GUTENBERG LICENSE +PLEASE READ THIS BEFORE YOU DISTRIBUTE OR USE THIS WORK + +To protect the Project Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting the free +distribution of electronic works, by using or distributing this work +(or any other work associated in any way with the phrase "Project +Gutenberg"), you agree to comply with all the terms of the Full Project +Gutenberg-tm License available with this file or online at + www.gutenberg.org/license. + + +Section 1. General Terms of Use and Redistributing Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic works + +1.A. By reading or using any part of this Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work, you indicate that you have read, understand, agree to +and accept all the terms of this license and intellectual property +(trademark/copyright) agreement. If you do not agree to abide by all +the terms of this agreement, you must cease using and return or destroy +all copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in your possession. +If you paid a fee for obtaining a copy of or access to a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work and you do not agree to be bound by the +terms of this agreement, you may obtain a refund from the person or +entity to whom you paid the fee as set forth in paragraph 1.E.8. + +1.B. "Project Gutenberg" is a registered trademark. It may only be +used on or associated in any way with an electronic work by people who +agree to be bound by the terms of this agreement. There are a few +things that you can do with most Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works +even without complying with the full terms of this agreement. See +paragraph 1.C below. There are a lot of things you can do with Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works if you follow the terms of this agreement +and help preserve free future access to Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. See paragraph 1.E below. + +1.C. The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation ("the Foundation" +or PGLAF), owns a compilation copyright in the collection of Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic works. Nearly all the individual works in the +collection are in the public domain in the United States. If an +individual work is in the public domain in the United States and you are +located in the United States, we do not claim a right to prevent you from +copying, distributing, performing, displaying or creating derivative +works based on the work as long as all references to Project Gutenberg +are removed. Of course, we hope that you will support the Project +Gutenberg-tm mission of promoting free access to electronic works by +freely sharing Project Gutenberg-tm works in compliance with the terms of +this agreement for keeping the Project Gutenberg-tm name associated with +the work. You can easily comply with the terms of this agreement by +keeping this work in the same format with its attached full Project +Gutenberg-tm License when you share it without charge with others. + +1.D. The copyright laws of the place where you are located also govern +what you can do with this work. Copyright laws in most countries are in +a constant state of change. If you are outside the United States, check +the laws of your country in addition to the terms of this agreement +before downloading, copying, displaying, performing, distributing or +creating derivative works based on this work or any other Project +Gutenberg-tm work. The Foundation makes no representations concerning +the copyright status of any work in any country outside the United +States. + +1.E. Unless you have removed all references to Project Gutenberg: + +1.E.1. The following sentence, with active links to, or other immediate +access to, the full Project Gutenberg-tm License must appear prominently +whenever any copy of a Project Gutenberg-tm work (any work on which the +phrase "Project Gutenberg" appears, or with which the phrase "Project +Gutenberg" is associated) is accessed, displayed, performed, viewed, +copied or distributed: + +This eBook is for the use of anyone anywhere at no cost and with +almost no restrictions whatsoever. You may copy it, give it away or +re-use it under the terms of the Project Gutenberg License included +with this eBook or online at www.gutenberg.org + +1.E.2. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is derived +from the public domain (does not contain a notice indicating that it is +posted with permission of the copyright holder), the work can be copied +and distributed to anyone in the United States without paying any fees +or charges. If you are redistributing or providing access to a work +with the phrase "Project Gutenberg" associated with or appearing on the +work, you must comply either with the requirements of paragraphs 1.E.1 +through 1.E.7 or obtain permission for the use of the work and the +Project Gutenberg-tm trademark as set forth in paragraphs 1.E.8 or +1.E.9. + +1.E.3. If an individual Project Gutenberg-tm electronic work is posted +with the permission of the copyright holder, your use and distribution +must comply with both paragraphs 1.E.1 through 1.E.7 and any additional +terms imposed by the copyright holder. Additional terms will be linked +to the Project Gutenberg-tm License for all works posted with the +permission of the copyright holder found at the beginning of this work. + +1.E.4. Do not unlink or detach or remove the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License terms from this work, or any files containing a part of this +work or any other work associated with Project Gutenberg-tm. + +1.E.5. Do not copy, display, perform, distribute or redistribute this +electronic work, or any part of this electronic work, without +prominently displaying the sentence set forth in paragraph 1.E.1 with +active links or immediate access to the full terms of the Project +Gutenberg-tm License. + +1.E.6. You may convert to and distribute this work in any binary, +compressed, marked up, nonproprietary or proprietary form, including any +word processing or hypertext form. However, if you provide access to or +distribute copies of a Project Gutenberg-tm work in a format other than +"Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other format used in the official version +posted on the official Project Gutenberg-tm web site (www.gutenberg.org), +you must, at no additional cost, fee or expense to the user, provide a +copy, a means of exporting a copy, or a means of obtaining a copy upon +request, of the work in its original "Plain Vanilla ASCII" or other +form. Any alternate format must include the full Project Gutenberg-tm +License as specified in paragraph 1.E.1. + +1.E.7. Do not charge a fee for access to, viewing, displaying, +performing, copying or distributing any Project Gutenberg-tm works +unless you comply with paragraph 1.E.8 or 1.E.9. + +1.E.8. You may charge a reasonable fee for copies of or providing +access to or distributing Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works provided +that + +- You pay a royalty fee of 20% of the gross profits you derive from + the use of Project Gutenberg-tm works calculated using the method + you already use to calculate your applicable taxes. The fee is + owed to the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark, but he + has agreed to donate royalties under this paragraph to the + Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation. Royalty payments + must be paid within 60 days following each date on which you + prepare (or are legally required to prepare) your periodic tax + returns. Royalty payments should be clearly marked as such and + sent to the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation at the + address specified in Section 4, "Information about donations to + the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation." + +- You provide a full refund of any money paid by a user who notifies + you in writing (or by e-mail) within 30 days of receipt that s/he + does not agree to the terms of the full Project Gutenberg-tm + License. You must require such a user to return or + destroy all copies of the works possessed in a physical medium + and discontinue all use of and all access to other copies of + Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +- You provide, in accordance with paragraph 1.F.3, a full refund of any + money paid for a work or a replacement copy, if a defect in the + electronic work is discovered and reported to you within 90 days + of receipt of the work. + +- You comply with all other terms of this agreement for free + distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm works. + +1.E.9. If you wish to charge a fee or distribute a Project Gutenberg-tm +electronic work or group of works on different terms than are set +forth in this agreement, you must obtain permission in writing from +both the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation and Michael +Hart, the owner of the Project Gutenberg-tm trademark. Contact the +Foundation as set forth in Section 3 below. + +1.F. + +1.F.1. Project Gutenberg volunteers and employees expend considerable +effort to identify, do copyright research on, transcribe and proofread +public domain works in creating the Project Gutenberg-tm +collection. Despite these efforts, Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works, and the medium on which they may be stored, may contain +"Defects," such as, but not limited to, incomplete, inaccurate or +corrupt data, transcription errors, a copyright or other intellectual +property infringement, a defective or damaged disk or other medium, a +computer virus, or computer codes that damage or cannot be read by +your equipment. + +1.F.2. LIMITED WARRANTY, DISCLAIMER OF DAMAGES - Except for the "Right +of Replacement or Refund" described in paragraph 1.F.3, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation, the owner of the Project +Gutenberg-tm trademark, and any other party distributing a Project +Gutenberg-tm electronic work under this agreement, disclaim all +liability to you for damages, costs and expenses, including legal +fees. YOU AGREE THAT YOU HAVE NO REMEDIES FOR NEGLIGENCE, STRICT +LIABILITY, BREACH OF WARRANTY OR BREACH OF CONTRACT EXCEPT THOSE +PROVIDED IN PARAGRAPH 1.F.3. YOU AGREE THAT THE FOUNDATION, THE +TRADEMARK OWNER, AND ANY DISTRIBUTOR UNDER THIS AGREEMENT WILL NOT BE +LIABLE TO YOU FOR ACTUAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, CONSEQUENTIAL, PUNITIVE OR +INCIDENTAL DAMAGES EVEN IF YOU GIVE NOTICE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH +DAMAGE. + +1.F.3. LIMITED RIGHT OF REPLACEMENT OR REFUND - If you discover a +defect in this electronic work within 90 days of receiving it, you can +receive a refund of the money (if any) you paid for it by sending a +written explanation to the person you received the work from. If you +received the work on a physical medium, you must return the medium with +your written explanation. The person or entity that provided you with +the defective work may elect to provide a replacement copy in lieu of a +refund. If you received the work electronically, the person or entity +providing it to you may choose to give you a second opportunity to +receive the work electronically in lieu of a refund. If the second copy +is also defective, you may demand a refund in writing without further +opportunities to fix the problem. + +1.F.4. Except for the limited right of replacement or refund set forth +in paragraph 1.F.3, this work is provided to you 'AS-IS', WITH NO OTHER +WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO +WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR ANY PURPOSE. + +1.F.5. Some states do not allow disclaimers of certain implied +warranties or the exclusion or limitation of certain types of damages. +If any disclaimer or limitation set forth in this agreement violates the +law of the state applicable to this agreement, the agreement shall be +interpreted to make the maximum disclaimer or limitation permitted by +the applicable state law. The invalidity or unenforceability of any +provision of this agreement shall not void the remaining provisions. + +1.F.6. INDEMNITY - You agree to indemnify and hold the Foundation, the +trademark owner, any agent or employee of the Foundation, anyone +providing copies of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works in accordance +with this agreement, and any volunteers associated with the production, +promotion and distribution of Project Gutenberg-tm electronic works, +harmless from all liability, costs and expenses, including legal fees, +that arise directly or indirectly from any of the following which you do +or cause to occur: (a) distribution of this or any Project Gutenberg-tm +work, (b) alteration, modification, or additions or deletions to any +Project Gutenberg-tm work, and (c) any Defect you cause. + + +Section 2. Information about the Mission of Project Gutenberg-tm + +Project Gutenberg-tm is synonymous with the free distribution of +electronic works in formats readable by the widest variety of computers +including obsolete, old, middle-aged and new computers. It exists +because of the efforts of hundreds of volunteers and donations from +people in all walks of life. + +Volunteers and financial support to provide volunteers with the +assistance they need are critical to reaching Project Gutenberg-tm's +goals and ensuring that the Project Gutenberg-tm collection will +remain freely available for generations to come. In 2001, the Project +Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation was created to provide a secure +and permanent future for Project Gutenberg-tm and future generations. +To learn more about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation +and how your efforts and donations can help, see Sections 3 and 4 +and the Foundation information page at www.gutenberg.org + + +Section 3. Information about the Project Gutenberg Literary Archive +Foundation + +The Project Gutenberg Literary Archive Foundation is a non profit +501(c)(3) educational corporation organized under the laws of the +state of Mississippi and granted tax exempt status by the Internal +Revenue Service. The Foundation's EIN or federal tax identification +number is 64-6221541. Contributions to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation are tax deductible to the full extent +permitted by U.S. federal laws and your state's laws. + +The Foundation's principal office is located at 4557 Melan Dr. S. +Fairbanks, AK, 99712., but its volunteers and employees are scattered +throughout numerous locations. Its business office is located at 809 +North 1500 West, Salt Lake City, UT 84116, (801) 596-1887. Email +contact links and up to date contact information can be found at the +Foundation's web site and official page at www.gutenberg.org/contact + +For additional contact information: + Dr. Gregory B. Newby + Chief Executive and Director + gbnewby@pglaf.org + +Section 4. Information about Donations to the Project Gutenberg +Literary Archive Foundation + +Project Gutenberg-tm depends upon and cannot survive without wide +spread public support and donations to carry out its mission of +increasing the number of public domain and licensed works that can be +freely distributed in machine readable form accessible by the widest +array of equipment including outdated equipment. Many small donations +($1 to $5,000) are particularly important to maintaining tax exempt +status with the IRS. + +The Foundation is committed to complying with the laws regulating +charities and charitable donations in all 50 states of the United +States. Compliance requirements are not uniform and it takes a +considerable effort, much paperwork and many fees to meet and keep up +with these requirements. We do not solicit donations in locations +where we have not received written confirmation of compliance. To +SEND DONATIONS or determine the status of compliance for any +particular state visit www.gutenberg.org/donate + +While we cannot and do not solicit contributions from states where we +have not met the solicitation requirements, we know of no prohibition +against accepting unsolicited donations from donors in such states who +approach us with offers to donate. + +International donations are gratefully accepted, but we cannot make +any statements concerning tax treatment of donations received from +outside the United States. U.S. laws alone swamp our small staff. + +Please check the Project Gutenberg Web pages for current donation +methods and addresses. Donations are accepted in a number of other +ways including checks, online payments and credit card donations. +To donate, please visit: www.gutenberg.org/donate + + +Section 5. General Information About Project Gutenberg-tm electronic +works. + +Professor Michael S. Hart was the originator of the Project Gutenberg-tm +concept of a library of electronic works that could be freely shared +with anyone. For forty years, he produced and distributed Project +Gutenberg-tm eBooks with only a loose network of volunteer support. + +Project Gutenberg-tm eBooks are often created from several printed +editions, all of which are confirmed as Public Domain in the U.S. +unless a copyright notice is included. Thus, we do not necessarily +keep eBooks in compliance with any particular paper edition. + +Most people start at our Web site which has the main PG search facility: + + www.gutenberg.org + +This Web site includes information about Project Gutenberg-tm, +including how to make donations to the Project Gutenberg Literary +Archive Foundation, how to help produce our new eBooks, and how to +subscribe to our email newsletter to hear about new eBooks. + + +</pre> + +</body> +</html> diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..d041b81 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/cover.jpg diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..196e138 --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/i002.jpg diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..5e5645c --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/i003.jpg diff --git a/old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg b/old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg Binary files differnew file mode 100644 index 0000000..f801a1e --- /dev/null +++ b/old/44394-h/images/spine.jpg |
